D70379GC10 sg1

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited. Copyright© 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates.
EMAK
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y
Custom CW: Financial n tG
ah eBootcamp
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e tStudent
o Guide - Volume 1
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
X53119GC10
1.0
10/18/2007
D53157
EMAK
Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may
copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or
altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download,
upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part
without the express authorization of Oracle.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document,
please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This
document is not warranted to be error-free.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the
United States Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are
s
restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract. a
Trademark Notice h
) ฺa
o m
o ฺc uide
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their repective
o
ah ent G
owners.
y
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
EMAK
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Chapter 01 - Oracle General Ledger Process . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 2 - Chapter 02 - Accounting Setup Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Chapter 3 - Chapter 03 - Ledger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Chapter 4 - Chapter 04 - Basic Journal Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 5 - Chapter 07 - Advanced Journal Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Chapter 6 - Chapter 09 - Financial Budgeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Chapter 7 - Chapter 11 - Consolidations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Chapter 8 - Chapter 13 - Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
iii
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited. Copyright© 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. EMAK
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
Oracle General
y ah Ledger
n t G
0
Process 0 @ tude
e s 20 this S
e r g Chapter
s e 1
l a k_g e to u
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.
Oracle General Ledger Process

Chapter 1 - Page 1
Chapter 1 - page 1
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 2
Chapter 1 - page 2
EMAK

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 3
Chapter 1 - page 3
EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 4
Chapter 1 - page 4
EMAK
Oracle General Ledger Overview

s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laGenerala n s
M n-t
Oracle r Ledger Overview
o General Ledger is the central repository of accounting information. The main
ThenOracle
purpose of a general ledger system is to record financial activity of a company and to produce
financial and management reports to help people inside and outside the organization make
decisions.

Chapter 1 - Page 5
Chapter 1 - page 5
EMAK
General Ledger Overview

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Ledger
a n s
r
M n-t Overview
General
no General Ledger is a comprehensive financial management solution that enables you to:
Oracle
• Record and Review Accounting Information
• Import data from subsidiary ledgers, or enter journals to record actual or budget
transactions directly into Oracle General Ledger.
• Enter encumbrance journals to track encumbrances through the purchase process and to
control spending against budgeted amounts.
• Review account balances online or through reports.
• Analyze, correct, and adjust accounting information.
• Correct actual, budget, and encumbrance information.
• Revalue and translate balances denominated in foreign currencies.
• Consolidate balances from multiple ledgers.
• Analyze Accounting Information
• Integrate Oracle General Ledger with Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting, Oracle
Discoverer, or Web Applications Desktop Integrator to simplify the budgeting and
forecasting process.

Chapter 1 - Page 6
Chapter 1 - page 6
EMAK
Functions and Features

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la and a n s
M n-t
Functions r Features
no Access
Information
• Access information stored in the General Ledger through online inquiries or reporting and
analysis tools. Oracle General Ledger is the repository of your organization's financial
information.
Financial Controls
• Use security features to control access to specific areas and functions of General Ledger.
Data Collection
• Collect data from Oracle subledgers and non-Oracle feeder systems.
Financial Reporting and Analysis
• Select from a variety of Standard Reports and Listings.
• Use the Financial Statement Generator to build customized reports with reusable report
objects.
• Use Web ADI (Web Applications Desktop Integrator) Report Manager to build reports
and drilldown on balances within a spreadsheet environment.

Chapter 1 - Page 7
Chapter 1 - page 7
EMAK
General Ledger Accounting Cycle

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Ledger
a n s
r
M n-t Accounting Cycle
General
o period
1.nOpen
2. Create/reverse journal entries
3. Post
4. Review
5. Revalue
6. Translate
7. Consolidate
8. Review/correct balances
9. Run accounting reports
10. Close accounting period

Chapter 1 - Page 8
Chapter 1 - page 8
EMAK
Critical Implementation Issues

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laImplementation
M n-t
Critical r Issues
no information
Shared
• Oracle Applications share information to avoid redundancy, minimize setup time, and
keep systems synchronized.
• Identify the key entities shared by Oracle Applications.
• Define setup parameters required by multiple applications.
Information Flows
• Record transactions once and pass them to the next business process.
• Use Oracle Applications open interfaces to import transactions.
Open interfaces
• Transfer data within Oracle Applications.
• Import transactions from other applications into Oracle Applications.
Non-Oracle Systems
• Obtain input from all business areas and applications that are affected by the
implementation.

Chapter 1 - Page 9
Chapter 1 - page 9
EMAK
Oracle General Ledger Integrates with …

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laGenerala n s
M n-t
Oracle r Ledger Integrates with …
nois a list of just some of the Financial and Human Resource Management products that
Here
integrate with General Ledger.
• Oracle Payables sends invoices, payments, realized gain and loss on foreign currency, and
invoice price variance to GL.
• Oracle Receivables sends invoices, payments, adjustments, debit memos, credit memos,
cash, chargebacks, and realized gain and loss on foreign currency to GL.
• Oracle Assets sends capital and construction in process asset additions, cost adjustments,
transfers, retirements, depreciation, and reclassifications to GL.
• Oracle Purchasing sends accruals or receipts not invoiced, purchase orders, final closes,
and cancellations to GL.
• Oracle Projects sends cost distribution of labor and non-labor costs, and project revenue to
GL.
• Oracle Treasury sends revaluation and accrual entries to GL.
• Oracle Property Manager sends revenues and expenses related to real estate to GL.

Chapter 1 - Page 10
Chapter 1 - page 10
EMAK
• Oracle Lease Management sends accounting distributions related to leases, such as

bookings of contracts, accruals, asset dispositions, terminations, and adjustments for
multi-GAAP contracts to GL.
• Oracle HR shares employee information with GL.
• Oracle Payroll sends salary, deductions, and tax information to GL.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 11
Chapter 1 - page 11
EMAK
Oracle General Ledger Integrates with …

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laGeneral
a n s
M n-t
Oracle r Ledger Integrates with …
o terms of manufacturing and public sector applications, Inventory sends cycle counts,
•nIn
physical inventory adjustments, receiving transactions, delivery transactions,
intercompany transfers, sales order issues, internal requisitions, sub-inventory transfers,
and Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) to GL.
• Work In Process sends material issues or backflush from WIP to GL, as well as
completions, returns, resource and overhead transactions, and cost updates.
• Oracle Labor Distribution sends salary costs to GL.
• Oracle Grants Accounting sends grant amounts received to build a project as well as
unbilled revenue to GL.
• Oracle Public Sector Budgeting sends budget and forecast amounts to GL.

Chapter 1 - Page 12
Chapter 1 - page 12
EMAK
Also Integrates with …

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ranswith …
M n-t
Also Integrates
o
•nGeneral Ledger's integration with Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting (EPB) allows
you to easily identify, analyze, model, budget, forecast, and report on information stored
in your general ledger. Use Oracle GL to maintain and report on account balances
throughout the accounting period, and use Financial Analyzer to analyze financial data,
such as actual and budget balances, after closing the period. You can automatically
transfer actual, budget, or encumbrance data, as well as functional, statistical, and foreign
entered data from General Ledger to Financial Analyzer. From Financial Analyzer, you
can perform sophisticated budgeting and modeling, make changes to budgets and write
back budget data to a new budget in GL or to several budget versions for comparative
reporting. You can also drill directly from EPB balances to balances and transactions in
Oracle General Ledger. This provides EPB users with immediate and direct access to GL
data without having to run reports or account inquiries in GL.
• Oracle Financial Services Applications (OFSA) is a product suite that helps financial
services institutions assess enterprise performance. This integration allows the transfer of
General Ledger balances to OFSA to reconcile OFSA instrument tables, calculate transfer
pricing of non-interest balance sheet items, or perform allocations. The results of OFSA

Chapter 1 - Page 13
Chapter 1 - page 13
EMAK
allocation and transfer pricing results can then be transferred back to GL for posting and
reporting.
• The integration with Oracle Daily Business Intelligence (DBI) allows you to get a daily
snapshot of your company's financial picture through its E-Business Suite Portals. The
over 200 pre-built Portals provide every user in the enterprise with the right information
that they need, about every aspect of their business. The information spans across multiple
applications to give you real-time information all in one place.

• The integration with Oracle Activity Based Management (OABM) allows you to perform
complex analysis on costs that are collected in General Ledger in a separate analysis
environment—apart from your GL data. OABM is optimized to support multi-layer
complex cost assignment rules, activity hierarchies, and complex product and service
definitions in terms of activities with complete activity definitions.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 14
Chapter 1 - page 14
EMAK
Integrating with Subledgers

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rwith a n s
M n-t Subledgers
Integrating
no information from Oracle subledgers is a two-step process:
Transferring
• Data is pushed into the GL_INTERFACE table from the subledger using a transfer
program.
• Then Journal Import pulls the information from the interface table to create valid, postable
journal entries in General Ledger.
When you initiate the transfer program from Oracle subledgers, such as Oracle Payables or
Oracle Receivables, you can choose to also submit the Journal Import process. If you do not
choose to run Journal Import from the subledger, you must run Journal Import separately in
General Ledger, using the Import Journals window, in order to create postable journal entries.

Chapter 1 - Page 15
Chapter 1 - page 15
EMAK
Importing to General Ledger from Non-Oracle Applications

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la toraGeneral
M n-t
Importing Ledger from Non-Oracle Applications
no Import
Journal
• Use Journal Import to automatically import budget, actual, and encumbrance data from
your non-Oracle applications. You can create SQL Loader script to load the data into the
interface.
• You can also check funds and reserve them for your imported transactions.
• Web Applications Desktop Integrator (Web ADI)
• You can enter data in a spreadsheet and upload to General Ledger:
- Prepare and analyze budgets.
- Prepare functional and foreign journal entries.

Chapter 1 - Page 16
Chapter 1 - page 16
EMAK
Overview of Accounting Setup Manager

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 17
Chapter 1 - page 17
EMAK
Foreign Currency Concepts

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Currency
a n s
M n-t
Foreign r Concepts
no
Conversion
• Conversion refers to foreign currency transactions that are immediately converted at the
time of entry to the ledger currency of the ledger in which the transaction takes place.
Revaluation
• Revaluation adjusts liability or asset accounts that may be materially understated or
overstated at the end of a period due to a fluctuation in the exchange rate between the time
the transaction was entered and the end of the period.
Translation
• Translation refers to the act of restating an entire ledger or balances for a company from
the ledger currency to a foreign currency.

Chapter 1 - Page 18
Chapter 1 - page 18
EMAK
Multiple Currency Support

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Currency
a n s
M n-t
Multiple r Support
no Currencies are integrated with ledgers. You specify the reporting currency as a part
Reporting
of the ledger with which you are working.
• Reporting currency is flexible. You can maintain additional currency representations at
three different levels:
- Balance level
- Journal level
- Subledger level
• Balance level maintains translated balances. Every time you run translation in General
Ledger, balances are stored in a balance level reporting currency.
• Journal level, is a currency representation of only your GL journals and balances. Every
time you post a journal in GL, the journal will be converted to one or more journal level
reporting currencies.
• Subledger level is a complete currency representation of your subledger transactions, GL
journals entries and balances.

Chapter 1 - Page 19
Chapter 1 - page 19
EMAK
Every time you enter a subledger transaction or enter and post a journal directly in GL, the
same transaction and journal will be converted to one or more associated subledger level
Reporting Currencies are not the same as secondary ledgers. Looking at the 4 C's that define a
ledger, we have a chart of accounts, calendar, accounting method, and currency.
If you only need multiple currencies to support your reporting requirements, use reporting
currencies.
If you need to account for your data using different calendars, charts of accounts, accounting
methods in addition to currency, use a secondary ledger.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 20
Chapter 1 - page 20
EMAK
Budgeting
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
Budgeting
no in Oracle General Ledger (GL)
Budgeting
• Create an unlimited number of budgets or forecasts.
• Control user access to budgets.
• Create budget organizations to mirror the various levels of your company's organization
and to control user access to the budget information.
• Create master-detail budgets.
Budgeting with Web Applications Desktop Integrator (Web ADI)
• Enter budget amounts in the familiarity of a spreadsheet, then upload your budget data to
General Ledger.
• Downloads both budget or actual amounts and use to calculating new budget amounts,
then be upload the new budget amounts into Oracle General Ledger.
Note: You can also use Oracle Planning and Budgeting to update budget balances in General
Ledger. For more information, refer to the Oracle Planning and Budgeting User’s Guide.

Chapter 1 - Page 21
Chapter 1 - page 21
EMAK
Overview of Enterprise Planning and Budgeting (EPB)

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la ofraEnterprise
M n-t
Overview Planning and Budgeting
nois Enterprise Planning and Budgeting (EPB)?
What
• An application built on the integrated multi-dimensional and relational technology in
Oracle10g
• An application for planning, budgeting, forecasting, reporting, monitoring, and analysis
• An application that provides sophisticated data modeling and multi-dimensional analysis
• A keystone of Oracle's CPM initiative
• An application tailored for customer's own business processes

Chapter 1 - Page 22
Chapter 1 - page 22
EMAK
Reporting and Analysis

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la and a n s
M n-t
Reporting r Analysis
no Account and Transaction Analysis:
Online
• Drilldown to account balances and journal entries to their source. For example, you can
drill down from a Payables journal entry to the original transaction in Oracle Payables.
Standard Reports and Listings:
• Oracle General Ledger provides over 70 different standard reports and listings to help you
view financial and non-financial information.
Financial Statement Generator reports:
• The Financial Statement Generator (FSG) is a powerful tool that allows you to create
custom financial statements without programming.
Web ADI Report Manager:
• With Report Manager, you can define reports graphically in Excel, then upload the report
definitions to General Ledger as Financial Statement Generator (FSG) report objects. You
can also download existing FSG reports, modify them in Report Wizard, then save the
modified definition to General Ledger. You can select amounts from spreadsheet-based

Chapter 1 - Page 23
Chapter 1 - page 23
EMAK
FSG reports and drill into the underlying financial information within Oracle
Applications.
Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting:
• Use Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting, Oracle's On Line Analytical Processing
(OLAP) application, to perform in depth analysis, modeling, budgeting, reporting, and
forecasting functions using General Ledger data without additional data entry.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 24
Chapter 1 - page 24
EMAK
Standard Reports and Listings

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Reports
a n s
M n-t
Standard r and Listings
no General Ledger provides several types of reports and listings to meet your business
Oracle
needs. All of the information in these reports and listings is also available online.
You can obtain account analysis information, budget information, chart of accounts listing, and
many other types of data without customization.
Oracle General Ledger standard reports provide the following functionality:
• Request reports online. Your report is generated and printed in the background while you
continue to work.
• Group and submit reports into report sets to save time.
• Schedule reports to run at regularly scheduled intervals.

Chapter 1 - Page 25
Chapter 1 - page 25
EMAK
Financial Statement Generator Reports (FSG)

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Statement
a n s
M n-t
Financial r Generator Reports (FSG)
Younocan define custom financial reports, such as income statements and balance sheets, online
with complete control over the rows, columns, and content of your report. You can control
account assignments, headings, descriptions, format, and calculations in addition to the actual
content. The reusable report components make building reports quick and easy. You can copy
a report component from one report, make minor edits, then apply the report component to a
new report without having to create a new report from scratch.

Chapter 1 - Page 26
Chapter 1 - page 26
EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 27
Chapter 1 - page 27
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 1 - Page 28
Chapter 1 - page 28
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
Accounting y aSetup G
h ntManager
0 0 @ tude
e s 20 2 this S
Chapter
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Accounting Setup Manager

Chapter 2 - Page 1
Chapter 2 - page 29
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 2
Chapter 2 - page 30
EMAK

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 3
Chapter 2 - page 31
EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 4
Chapter 2 - page 32
EMAK
Accounting Setups
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSetups
a n s
Accounting
M n-t
o
Annaccounting setup defines the accounting context for one or more legal entities or a business
need if legal entities are not involved.
Defining an accounting setup is based on several factors, such as:
• legal environment
• number of legal entities maintained in the same primary ledger
• business needs
• transaction processing needs
Legal entities should be assigned to accounting setups to maintain a legal entity context for
transactions and use Oracle financial subledgers that require a legal entity context. No legal
entities should be assigned to accounting setups if there are business needs that do no require a
legal entity context.
If legal entities are involved, the general rule is to define a separate accounting setup for each
legal entity or group of legal entities that require their own primary ledger. In other words, if
legal entities require any one of the following attributes to be different from other legal entities,
a different primary ledger is required, and therefore a different accounting setup is required:

Chapter 2 - Page 5
Chapter 2 - page 33
EMAK
• Chart of Accounts: One legal entity requires a six-segment chart of accounts and another
requires only a four-segment chart of accounts.
• Accounting Calendar: One legal entity uses a 4-4-5 calendar and another uses a monthly
calendar; or one legal entity has a different fiscal year end than another.
• Primary Currency: Legal entities operate in different countries requiring them to use their
own local currencies.

• Subledger Accounting Method: Legal entities operate in different countries or industries
that have different accounting standards.
• Ledger Processing Options: Legal entities operate in different industries, such as retail and
financial services, and require different ledger processing options, such as maintaining
average daily balances for legal entities in the financial services industry.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 6
Chapter 2 - page 34
EMAK
Ledger Processing Options

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laProcessing
Ledger
M n-t r Options
noon the above information, four different accounting setups are created because each
Based
legal entity requires its own primary ledger. If the two U.S. legal entities (U.S. East and U.S.
West) share the same ledger processing options, they can share the same primary ledger and be
included in the same accounting setup.
Ledger Processing Options are defined at the ledger level and refer to the following options
that control how journals and transactions are processed for that ledger:
• First Ever Opened Period
• Number of Future Enterable Periods
• Retained Earnings Account
• Subledger Accounting Options, such as the subledger accounting method, journal
description language, entered currency balancing account, cash basis accounting, and the
ledger currency balancing account
• Option to track balances using a secondary segment
• Suspense Account
• Rounding Differences Tracking Account

Chapter 2 - Page 7
Chapter 2 - page 35
EMAK
• Intracompany Balancing option

• Journal Approval
• Journal Entry Tax
• Journal Reversal Criteria Set
• Default Period End Rate Type
• Default Period Average Rate Type

• Cumulative Translation Adjustment Account
• Journal Reconciliation
• Budgetary Control
• Reserve for Encumbrance Account
• Average Balance Processing
• Average Balance Consolidation
• Net Income Account
s a
• Transaction Calendar h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
If there are legal entities that require any one of the above ledger processing options to be
different, then define a separate primary ledger for each legal entity and therefore, a new
accounting setup. y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 8
Chapter 2 - page 36
EMAK
Secondary Ledgers
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rLedgers
a n s
Secondary
M n-t
no an unlimited number of secondary ledgers to each primary ledger of an accounting
Assign
setup. Each secondary ledger can be maintained at one of the following data conversion levels:
• The subledger level secondary ledger maintains subledger journals, general ledger journal
entries, and balances in the additional accounting representation. This data conversion
level uses both Subledger Accounting and the General Ledger Posting program to create
the necessary journals in both the primary and secondary ledgers simultaneously.
Subledger Accounting creates the journal entries from subledger transactions if the
subledger integrates with Subledger Accounting. General Ledger Posting creates the
journal entries for all other transactions that do no integrate with Subledger Accounting,
including manual journal entries.
• The journal level secondary ledger maintains primary ledger journal entries and balances
in an additional accounting representation. This type of secondary ledger is maintained
using the General Ledger Posting program. Every time a journal is posted in the primary
ledger, the same journal can be automatically replicated and maintained in the secondary
ledger for those journal sources and categories that are set up for this behavior.

Chapter 2 - Page 9
Chapter 2 - page 37
EMAK
• The balance level secondary ledger maintains primary ledger account balances in another
accounting representation. This type of secondary ledger requires Oracle General Ledger
Consolidation to transfer primary ledger balances to this secondary ledger.
• The adjustments only secondary ledger level is an incomplete accounting representation
that holds only adjustments. The adjustments can be manual adjustments or automated
adjustments from Subledger Accounting. This type of ledger must share the same chart of
accounts, accounting calendar/period type combination, and currency as the associated

primary ledger. To obtain a complete secondary accounting representation that includes
both the transactional data and the adjustments, use ledger sets to combine the
adjustments-only secondary ledger with the primary ledger when running reports.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 10
Chapter 2 - page 38
EMAK
Reporting Currencies
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Currencies
Reporting
M n-t r
noonly need a different currency representation of the primary or secondary ledgers, assign
If you
reporting currencies to them. Unlike secondary ledgers, reporting currencies must share the
same chart of accounts, accounting calendar/period type combination, subledger accounting
method, and ledger processing options as their source ledger.
As a general rule, always use reporting currencies instead of secondary ledgers if you only
need to maintain an accounting representation that differs in currency alone.
You can assign reporting currencies to both primary and secondary ledgers. Reporting
currencies are maintained at one of the following currency conversion levels:
• The subledger level reporting currency maintains a complete currency representation of
your subledger journals, General Ledger journals entries, and balances. When using the
subledger level reporting currency, define currency conversion rules. These rules provide
instructions on how to convert subledger and general ledger data to one or more subledger
level reporting currencies. Subledger level reporting currencies are maintained using both
Subledger Accounting and the General Ledger Posting program to create the necessary
subledger journals and General Ledger journals in both the primary and secondary ledgers
simultaneously. Subledger Accounting creates the journal entries from subledger

Chapter 2 - Page 11
Chapter 2 - page 39
EMAK
transactions if the subledger integrates with Subledger Accounting. General Ledger

Posting creates the journal entries for all other transactions that do not integrate with
Subledger Accounting, including manual journal entries.
• The journal level reporting currency maintains General Ledger journal entries and
balances in another currency representation. Journal level reporting currencies are
maintained using the General Ledger Posting program. Every time a journal is posted in
the source ledger, such as the primary or secondary ledger, the journal is automatically
converted to the respective currency of the journal level reporting currency.
• The balance level reporting currency only maintains balances in another currency. It
maintains the translated balances of the source ledger. Every time general ledger
translation is run in the source ledger, such as the primary or secondary ledger, the
translated balances are reflected in the balance level reporting currency.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 12
Chapter 2 - page 40
EMAK
Accounting Setup Considerations

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSetup
a n s
Accounting
M n-t Considerations
no creating accounting setups, carefully consider the number of legal entities that you want
Before
to assign to each accounting setup.
Associate each accounting setup with one of the following accounting environment types:
• Accounting Setups with One Legal Entity
• Accounting Setups with Multiple Legal Entities
• Accounting Setups with No Legal Entities

Chapter 2 - Page 13
Chapter 2 - page 41
EMAK
Accounting Setups with One Legal Entity

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSetups
a n s
Accounting
M n-t with One Legal Entity
noshould only assign one legal entity to an accounting setup type if your legal entities meet
You
any one of the following criteria:
• Operate in a country with strict legislative requirements that require the legal entity to
maintain its accounting data separate from other legal entities
• Have specific legal or statutory rules that require a separate ledger for the legal entity
• Require different primary ledger attributes from other legal entities. For example, the legal
entity requires any one of the following ledger attributes to be different from other legal
entities:
- Chart of Accounts: One legal entity requires a 10-segment chart of accounts and
another requires a 6-segment chart of accounts.
- Accounting Calendar: One legal entity requires a weekly calendar and another
requires a monthly calendar.
- Primary Currency: There are legal entities and companies that require different
primary currencies to act as their main record-keeping currency.

Chapter 2 - Page 14
Chapter 2 - page 42
EMAK
- Subledger Accounting Method: One legal entity uses the accrual method of
accounting and another uses the cash basis of accounting.
- Ledger Processing Options: One legal entity wants to translate revenue and expense
accounts using period-end balances while another legal entity wants to use year-to-
date balances.
• Need autonomous document sequencing of transactions and journals for each legal entity
• Need to open and close periods autonomously for each legal entity
• Have tax requirements that are specific for a legal entity
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 15
Chapter 2 - page 43
EMAK
Accounting Setups with Multiple Legal Entities

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSetups
a n s
Accounting
M n-t with Multiple Legal Entities
noaccounting setup has more than one legal entity it means that multiple legal entities can
If an
share the same primary ledger attributes, such as the same chart of accounts, accounting
calendar/period type combination, currency, subledger accounting method, and ledger
processing options.
Assign multiple legal entities to the same accounting setup if all of the legal entities assigned to
the accounting setup meet all of the following criteria:
• operate in a country that allows multiple legal entities to share the same primary ledger
and ledger attributes, such as the same chart of accounts, calendar, primary currency,
subledger accounting method, document sequence, and accounting options
• do not need to have different ledger processing options for each legal entity. For example,
legal entities can use the same general ledger translation rule and cumulative translation
adjustment accounts to translate balances.
• do not need to open and close periods independently by legal entity
• do not require autonomous document sequencing for a legal entity
• do not have tax requirements that are specific for a legal entity

Chapter 2 - Page 16
Chapter 2 - page 44
EMAK
Accounting Setups with No Legal Entities

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSetups
a n s
Accounting
M n-t with No Legal Entities
no setups that do not have legal entities assigned can be used for multiple purposes
Accounting
based on business needs. For example, define an accounting setup with no legal entity assigned
if a legal entity context is not required for transaction processing, or use it to supplement the
accounting contained in other accounting setups that have legal entities assigned.
You can use accounting setups with no legal entities for the following business needs:
• You do not need to maintain transactions using a legal entity context.
• You are using a separate instance of General Ledger as a standalone application and do
not plan to integrate with Oracle financial subledgers that require a legal entity context.
• You are not integrating with Oracle financial subledgers but are using Subledger
Accounting to integrate Oracle General Ledger with non-Oracle systems.
• You want to maintain an additional accounting setup for management reporting purposes
or consolidation purposes.

Chapter 2 - Page 17
Chapter 2 - page 45
EMAK
Designing the Chart of Accounts

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la the a n s
Designing
M n-t r Chart of Accounts
no company uses legal entities and wants the ability to identify legal entities during
If your
transaction processing, designate the balancing segment of the chart of accounts as the legal
entity or company segment. This enables you to identify transactions per legal entity and take
full advantage of the legal entity accounting features available, such as intercompany
accounting.
If you have multiple legal entities that use different charts of accounts, it is recommended that
you limit the number of value sets that you define for the balancing segment. This allows you
to share the same value set across multiple charts of accounts and assign unique balancing
segment values for each legal entity that is consistent across charts of account.

Chapter 2 - Page 18
Chapter 2 - page 46
EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 19
Chapter 2 - page 47
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 2 - Page 20
Chapter 2 - page 48
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
Ledger yah ent G
0
Chapter03
0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 1
Chapter 3 - page 49
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 2
Chapter 3 - page 50
EMAK
Ledger
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 3
Chapter 3 - page 51
EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 4
Chapter 3 - page 52
EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 5
Chapter 3 - page 53
EMAK
Ledgers Defined
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Defined
a n s
Ledgers
M n-t r
no
A fundamental concept in Oracle Applications is the "Ledger." The Ledger represents an
accounting representation for an organization that is accountable in a self-contained way.
A ledger owner might be a legal entity, a group of companies in a common legal environment,
a substantial operation within a legal entity but with legal entity attributes, or a foreign branch.
Ledgers are also used to consolidate and manage Organizational Models in reporting. In a pure
implementation, "a legal entity accounts for itself in a ledger."
A ledger provides balanced ledger accounting for the accounting entity and serves as the
repository of financial information. Consequently, it is the principal source of information for
the analytical applications in the Oracle E-Business Suite.
Ledger balances have meaning. They assert that the balance on an account at a given date has a
specific value in a particular currency and is properly calculated. This implies a consistent
application of what we sometimes call "the 4 Cs": Chart of Accounts (COA), Calendar,
Currency, and accounting Convention. The COA provides the account code; Calendar the date
and accounting period; Currency the transaction currency; and Convention the accounting rules
and regulations for the company/country.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 6
Chapter 3 - page 54
EMAK
Accounting Setup Manager Overview

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Setupa n s
Account
M n-t r Manager Overview
no place for defining and maintaining accounting setup for the following:
Central
• Legal Entities
• Operating Units
• Ledgers
• Primary and Secondary Ledgers
• Reporting Currencies
• Subledger Accounting
• Inter- and Intra-company Balancing
• Sequencing
• Accounting and Reporting Sequencing
Accounting Setup Manager Concepts
Primary Ledgers
• Main, record-keeping ledger
• Defined by 4Cs:
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 7
Chapter 3 - page 55
EMAK
- Chart of accounts
- Accounting calendar
- Primary currency
- Subledger Accounting Method
Secondary Ledgers
• Optional, additional accounting representations of your primary ledger

• Can differ in one or more of the following from the primary ledger:
- Chart of accounts
- Accounting calendar
- Primary currency
By assigning two different subledger accounting methods to each ledger, you can use
Subledger Accounting (SLA) rules to simultaneously account for the same legal entity
s a
h
) ฺa
transaction in both ledgers to meet both fiscal and corporate requirements.
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 8
Chapter 3 - page 56
EMAK
Secondary Ledgers
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rLedgers
Secondary
M n-t
no Reasons
Business
• For global companies that must comply with different countries’ legal requirements
• Useful for supplementary purposes, such as consolidation or management reporting
• Provides a complete accounting picture within itself or a partial picture to be grouped with
other ledgers to provide a complete picture
Benefits
• More flexibility
• Represent legal entity(s) accounting information in a different:
- Accounting method
- Chart of Accounts
- Calendar
- Maintain at 4 Different Levels
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 9
Chapter 3 - page 57
EMAK
Secondary Ledger Conversion Levels

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rLedger
a n s
Secondary
M n-t Conversion Levels
no Level
Balance
• The balance level secondary ledger maintains primary ledger account balances in another
accounting representation. This type of secondary ledger requires Oracle General Ledger
Consolidation to transfer primary ledger balances to this secondary ledger.
Journal Level
• The journal level secondary ledger maintains journal entries and balances in an additional
accounting representation.
• This type of secondary ledger is maintained using the General Ledger Posting program.
Every time you post a journal in the primary ledger, the same journal can be automatically
replicated and maintained in the secondary ledger for those journal sources and categories
that are set up for this behavior.
Subledger Level
• The subledger level secondary ledger uses both Subledger Accounting and the General
Ledger Posting program to create the necessary journals in both the primary and
secondary ledgers simultaneously. Subledger Accounting creates the journal entries from
subledger transactions that integrate with Subledger Accounting.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 10
Chapter 3 - page 58
EMAK
• General Ledger Posting creates the journal entries for all other transactions that do not
integrate with Subledger Accounting, including manual journal entries.
Adjustments Only
• Secondary ledger level is an incomplete accounting representation that holds only
adjustments.
• The adjustments can be manual adjustments or automated adjustments from Subledger

Accounting. This type of ledger must share the same chart of accounts, accounting
calendar/period type combination, and currency as the associated primary ledger. To
obtain a complete secondary accounting representation that includes both the transactional
data and the adjustments, use ledger sets to combine the adjustments-only secondary
ledger with the primary ledger when running reports.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 11
Chapter 3 - page 59
EMAK
Reporting Currencies
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Currencies
Reporting
M n-t r
no Reasons
Business
• Useful for consolidation reporting and analysis
• No need to physically move balances to create views of consolidation data
• Beneficial for parent consolidation entities that share the same chart of accounts and
calendar with their subsidiaries
Benefits
• Tighter link to ledgers
• For accounting and reporting in another currency (in addition to the ledger’s primary
currency)
• Can be used with Primary or Secondary ledgers
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 12
Chapter 3 - page 60
EMAK
Reporting Currency (RC) Conversion Levels

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Currency
a n s
Reporting
M n-t r (RC) Conversion Levels
nocan maintain additional currency representations at three different levels:
You
- Balance level
- Journal level
- Subledger level
• Balance level maintains translated balances. Every time you run translation in General
Ledger, balances are stored in a balance level reporting currency.
• Journal level, is a currency representation of only your GL journals and balances. Every
time you post a journal in GL, the journal will be converted to one or more journal level
• Subledger level is a complete currency representation of your subledger transactions, GL
journals entries and balances.
Every time you enter a subledger transaction or enter and post a journal directly in GL, the
same transaction and journal will be converted to one or more associated subledger level
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 13
Chapter 3 - page 61
EMAK
Accounting Setup Steps

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSetup
a n s
Accounting
M n-t Steps
no you can use Accounting Setup Manager, you must complete the required General
Before
Ledger setup steps. At the very least, you must:
• Define a chart of accounts
• Define an accounting calendar
• Enable currencies
Creating an accounting setup consists of the following steps:
• Define Legal Entities. If you are not integrating with Oracle subledgers or are defining an
accounting setup that does not require a legal entity context, then you can skip this step.
• Assign none, one or multiple legal entities to an accounting setup.
• Define a primary ledger by specifying a name, chart of accounts, calendar, currency, and
optionally a subledger accounting method.
• Optionally assign one or more secondary ledgers. Secondary ledgers can differ from the
primary ledger in any or all of the following:
- Chart of accounts
- Calendar
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 14
Chapter 3 - page 62
EMAK
- Currency
• Optionally, you can create reporting currencies and assign to the primary and/or the
secondary ledger if you want to maintain multiple currency representations.
• Complete the Accounting Options by specifying the journal processing options and
transaction processing options for the setup components in this accounting setup.
• Mark the accounting setup complete. This will prevent certain changes to your accounting
setup and launch the GL Accounting Setup Program that will make your setup
components ready for data entry.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 15
Chapter 3 - page 63
EMAK
Accounting Setup Manager Create Accounting Setup

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSetup
a n s
Accounting
M n-t Manager—Create Accounting Setup
nocreating an accounting setup, there are two main steps that each have sub-steps. The two
When
main steps are to create the accounting setup structure and then to complete the accounting
options.
Create Accounting Setup Structure
The first step in creating an accounting setup structure is to assign none, one, or multiple legal
entities to an accounting setup.
Based on the number of legal entities you assign, the Accounting Environment Type will
default.
• If no legal entities are assigned, then Other defaults. The Other Accounting Environment
Type should be used if you are not using Oracle subledgers, or if you want a standalone
ledger for consolidation or management reporting purposes.
• If one legal entity is assigned, Exclusive Legal Environment defaults, but can be changed
to Shared legal Environment. You should use the Exclusive Legal Environment if
- the legal entity operates in a country where its transactions must be kept separate
from the transactions of other legal entities
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 16
Chapter 3 - page 64
EMAK
- the legal entity is required to use a separate document sequence from other legal
entities
- you plan to use Globalization features specific to that country in which the legal
entity operates
you should also use the Exclusive Legal Environment for a
legal entity that requires its own period close schedule
(i.e. it must close its period at a different time than

other legal entities).
- you want to use the Advanced Global Intercompany System, you must have at least
one legal assigned to the accounting setup
• If more than one legal entity is assigned, then the Shared Legal Environment type defaults
and cannot be changed. You should house multiple legal entities in the same accounting
setup
- if you operate in a country that does not require a separate document sequence for
each legal entity
s a
h
) ฺa
- All of the legal entities can share the same period close schedule, same primary and
o m
ฺc uide
secondary ledgers, and same journal processing options
o o
Select the accounting environment type carefully. You cannot change it once it is defined.
Complete Accounting Options y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
The second step is to assign a primary ledger and optionally one or more secondary ledgers.
e s 2 this
Secondary ledgers can differ in one or more of the following from the primary ledger:
• Chart of accounts g e rg use
l a
• Accounting calendar k_ e to
( m a ns
• Currency
c e
r g es le li
• Subledger accounting method
k Ge ferab
Save the structure.
a la rans
Note: You can add secondary ledgers at any time.
M n-t
no
Complete Accounting Options
After you have saved the structure, you are ready to complete the accounting options. The
accounting options page is in a checklist format. You must complete all of the required steps.
Different setup steps are displayed depending on whether or not you are using legal entities,
secondary ledgers, and reporting currencies.
It is strongly advised that you assign balancing segment values to legal entities to help you
identify legal entities during transaction processing and reporting. You must assign Balancing
Segment Values (BSV) to legal entities if you plan to use the Advanced Global Intercompany
System.
After all of the required setup steps are complete, you can complete the entire accounting
setup.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 17
Chapter 3 - page 65
EMAK
Accounting Calendar
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rCalendar
Accounting
M n-t
no General Ledger allows you to define multiple calendars and assign a different calendar
Oracle
to each ledger. For example, you can use a monthly calendar for one ledger, and a weekly
calendar for another.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 18
Chapter 3 - page 66
EMAK
Unlimited Currencies
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 19
Chapter 3 - page 67
EMAK
Sharing Ledgers Across Oracle Applications

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 20
Chapter 3 - page 68
EMAK
Chart of Accounts
s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a Accounts
lof a n s
Chart
M n-t r
no General Ledger, you build a chart of accounts using Accounting Flexfields.
In Oracle
Flexible:
• You can design a flexible account structure that meets your reporting needs and
anticipates the way you run your organization in the future.
Multiple Rollups:
• You can summarize accounting information from multiple perspectives by creating rollup
groups.
Ranges:
• With a well-planned account structure, you can use ranges to group accounts in reports,
specify security and cross-validation rules, define summary accounts and reporting
hierarchies.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 21
Chapter 3 - page 69
EMAK
Building the Chart of Accounts Structure

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la theraChart
Building
M n-t of Accounts Structure
o decisions you make when designing your chart of accounts are very important.
•nThe
Making changes in the future to the structure of your chart of accounts is difficult and not
recommended.
• Plan carefully to create an account structure that meets the current needs of your
organization and anticipate future requirements.
• Tailor your account structure for your industry and reporting requirements.
• Choose the number of segments, as well as the length, name, and order of each segment.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 22
Chapter 3 - page 70
EMAK
Identifying Business Requirements

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rBusiness
a n s
Identifying
M n-t Requirements
nothe detail for an item is contained in one application or a group of tightly integrated
If all
applications, retain the detail in the application itself. Do not add extra segments to the
Accounting Flexfield structure for detail that is tracked in your subledgers. For example, if you
are using Oracle Projects, do not include a project segment in your Accounting Flexfield.
Conversely, if you capture details in multiple applications that all pass data to Oracle General
Ledger, consider including other elements, such as product, in the Accounting Flexfield.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 23
Chapter 3 - page 71
EMAK
Identifying Segment Requirements

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSegment
a n s
Identifying
M n-t Requirements
noeach business dimension in a separate segment to avoid complicating your processing
Keep
and reporting.
Combining location and department into one segment may lead to difficulties when retrieving
data for the same department number across locations and restricting certain departments to
specific accounts.
Avoid having more than one meaning for each segment. Having more than one meaning can
make it difficult to default the segment, to isolate different data for reporting, and to logically
assign codes or numbers to segment values. For example, using one generic segment for
subaccount, project, and product elements make it impossible to analyze product sales by
individual project.
Consider creating extra segments to handle any future reporting requirements that may occur.
Consider data entry efficiency when ordering your segments.
Place segments with defaults at the beginning of your Accounting Flexfield, at the end, or both.
When the Accounting Flexfield window opens, the cursor is placed on the first blank, non-
defaulted segment. Once users enter all the values for the blank segments, they can press the
Enter key to save their work.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 24
Chapter 3 - page 72
EMAK
Use alpha characters only in parent account segments. Users can easily enter numerical child
value characters using the ten-key pad when they do not have to shift hand position for alpha
characters.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 25
Chapter 3 - page 73
EMAK
Analyzing Reporting Requirements

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Reporting
Analyzing
M n-t r Requirements
no reports currently produced outside of Oracle General Ledger either in stand-alone
Review
systems or in spreadsheets. Determine if adding segments to your Accounting Flexfield, or
structuring your segment values in a certain way using parent/child hierarchies, allows you to
generate those reports directly from Oracle General Ledger.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 26
Chapter 3 - page 74
EMAK
Creating a Worldwide Chart of Accounts

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la a Worldwide
Creating
M n-t r Chart of Accounts
o
It isnimportant to design a chart of accounts structure that can report effectively to meet
corporate business needs and comply with country specific regulations. How you accomplish
this depends on your organizations needs.
• There are two possible approaches:
- Assign Account Ranges
- Allow Reporting Units to Define Segments.
Assign Account Ranges
• For example, your department segment represents true cost centers, such as factories. You
assign a different range of accounts to each cost center to maintain detail information by
cost center.
- Factory 1: Assigned accounts 200 to 299
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 27
Chapter 3 - page 75
EMAK
Worldwide Chart of Accounts Example

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rChart
a n s
Worldwide
M n-t of Accounts Example
noReporting Units to Define Segments
Allow
• Establish general criteria for segments, but allow each reporting unit to define an
additional segment and values within its own ledger. For example, each factory creates its
own segment and values in the account structure but does not report detail balance
information for this segment to the parent company. The detail information disappears
upon consolidation.
- Factory 1:
Designates accounts 100 to 999 to represent distribution channels in the
subaccount segment.
- Factory 2:
Designates accounts 100 to 999 to represent products in the product segment.
Note: This method requires different ledgers for each unique Chart of Accounts.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 28
Chapter 3 - page 76
EMAK
Creating Vertical Structures

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Vertical
a n s
Creating
M n-t r Structures
no summarizing your data according to your management structure.
Consider
Create a separate segment for the lowest level in the Accounting Flexfield.
Strive to use parent rollups within a single segment for reporting, rather than creating
additional segments in the Accounting Flexfield.
For example, a child value of Company reports to Western Region which reports to European
Division. Only Company is a posting level account in the Accounting Flexfield. Set up
Western Region as parent of Company and Western Division as parent of European Region.
If your company reorganizes frequently, use parent/child relationships for maximum
flexibility.
A child value can be in multiple parents. It is better to create new parent structures than to
modify existing structures because changes can effect historical reporting. For example, if the
Western Region contained five companies, reported year end results, and then had two more
companies moved into its child range, then historical reports run after the two additional
companies were added would show different results.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 29
Chapter 3 - page 77
EMAK
Validation and Value Sets

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la and a n s
Validation
M n-t r Value Sets
o
Usenindependent validation when the meaning of a value does not depend on the value of
another segment.
Use dependent validation when the meaning of a value depends on the value of another
(independent) segment. The independent segment value determines the acceptable dependent
segment values.
Use table validation when the valid values already exist in a database table.
Points to Consider
• If you are validating your value set against a non-Oracle database table, have your System
Administrator register the table with Oracle Application Object Library.
• The validation type of an existing value set cannot be changed.
• It is strongly recommended that you use independent validation type with Accounting Key
Flexfield segments. Parent values cannot be defined for dependent segments. The
dependent validation type limits ability to use parent values with MassAllocations,
MassBudgeting, and Financial Statement Generator (FSG).
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 30
Chapter 3 - page 78
EMAK
Using Independent and Dependent Segments

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laIndependent
Using
M n-t r and Dependent Segments
no Segments
Independent
• For Accounting Key Flexfields, use independent segments. Do not use the Dependent
validation type. It complicates parent/child hierarchies and limits the ability to use parent
values with reporting and mass allocation journal entries.
Dependent Segments
• Dependent segments separate items that are closely related into individually identifiable
segments.
• Account/subaccount is the most common use for independent/dependent segments
(account is the major classification and subaccount provides more detail within the
account).
• With dependent segments, you must set up each combination of independent/dependent
values.
• You do not need to set up cross-validation rules for independent/ dependent combinations
since you set up each combination individually. Sometimes setting up dependent segments
is preferable to maintaining extensive validation rules for combinations of two segments
which have many values with no ranges or logic for the valid combinations.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 31
Chapter 3 - page 79
EMAK
• Dependent segments limit the values that appear on lists to the dependent values of the
independent segment chosen.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 32
Chapter 3 - page 80
EMAK
Designing Size and Numbering Systems

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Sizea n s
Designing
M n-t r and Numbering Systems
no and Alphanumeric Values
Numeric
• Numerics are preferable from a data entry perspective because users can use the ten key
pad. Sort order is clearer and ranges are easy to use.
• Alphanumerics may have some logic and meaning to users. If you do use alphanumeric
codes, set up the codes in all uppercase to enable consistency and ease of sorting and
querying.
• With an alphanumeric coding system, you can have alpha characters for parent values and
numeric codes for child values; this allows for visually distinguishing levels of your
hierarchy.
• Regardless of whether you use numbers or alphanumeric characters, you must use the char
(character) format type.
Segment Sizes
• To make data entry simpler, do not design the segments longer than needed. However,
consider your organization's growth requirements. If your organization currently has 30
departments, but plans to acquire more companies and expand its operations globally, a
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 33
Chapter 3 - page 81
EMAK
two character segment size will only accommodate up to 99 different department values.
A three character segment size can accommodate up 999 different department values.
• If you limit segment descriptions to a maximum of 30 characters, your flexfield pop-up
window does not include a horizontal scroll bar.
Coding Schemes
• Consider revising your existing coding schemas. Retaining the old logic of historic
numbering systems often places unnecessary constraints on the Oracle General Ledger and
may create ongoing processing, reporting, and maintenance problems.
• As Oracle General Ledger often uses ranges, make certain that these ranges are broad
enough to create new values in logical sequences.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 34
Chapter 3 - page 82
EMAK
Creating Accounting Flexfields

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 35
Chapter 3 - page 83
EMAK
Defining Value Sets

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Valuea n s
Defining
M n-t r Sets
o > Financials > Flexfields > Validation > Sets
(N)nSetup
What is a Value Set?
• A value set defines the boundaries for the attributes that you assign to a key or descriptive
flexfield segment. Value sets control what types of values can be used as Accounting
Flexfield segment values. Value sets determine the attributes of your segments such as
length, zero-fill, right-justify, alphanumerics, and value security. Value sets also control
how validation is performed. For example, with independent validation, a list of values
must be created and used.
Assigning Value Sets to Segments
• Assign one value set to each Accounting Flexfield segment.
• Share the same value sets across multiple ledgers to facilitate consolidation.
• You can use the same value set more than once within the same Accounting Flexfield
structure, as noted in the diagram above, where the same values set is used for the
Balancing and Intercompany segments.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 36
Chapter 3 - page 84
EMAK
How to Define Value Sets

1. Open the Value Sets window.
2. Enter the following:
- Value Set Name
- Description
- List Type
- Security Type
- Format Type
- Maximum Size
- Validation Type
3. Save your work.
Note: Changing the attributes of a value set affects all of the Accounting Flexfield segments
using that value set.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 37
Chapter 3 - page 85
EMAK
Defining the Accounting Flexfield Structure

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la theraAccounting
Defining
M n-t Flexfield Structure
Hownoto Define Flexfield Structure
(N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Segments
1. Open the Key Flexfield Segments window
2. Run a query to find:
- Application—Oracle General Ledger
- Flexfield Title—Accounting Flexfield
3. Place your in the Title field on any line and select (I) New
4. Enter the following information:
- Code
- Title will automatically populate
- Description
- View Name
5. Save your work
6. (B) Segments
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 38
Chapter 3 - page 86
EMAK
7. In the Segments Summary window, define the individual segments and the order in which
they appear
8. Place your cursor on line one
9. (B) Open
10. In the Validation Region of the Segments window, place checks in the Required and
Security Enabled checkboxes

11. In the Sizes Region, enter sizes for Display, Description, and Concatenated Description
fields
12. Save your work
13. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers
14. Select Enabled
• Each ledger can have its own Accounting Flexfield structure. Select the appropriate
symbol in the Segment Separator field.
s
• Choose whether to enable dynamic insertion to allow new account combinations to be a
h
) ฺa
entered. If dynamic insertion is not allowed, account combinations must be defined using
o m
ฺc uide
the GL Accounts window.
o o
• Choose to allow cross-validation rules to control the creation of account combinations.
y ah ent G
• You can also select to enable the flexfield structure and compile changes made to an
Accounting Flexfield.
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
• Enter a name, description, column and segment number for each segment. Segment
e rg use
numbers must be sequential for the accounting key flexfield, beginning with 1 (such as 1,
g
2, 3, …).
l a k_ e to
m a ns
• To prevent changes to the Accounting Flexfield structure definition, select the Freeze
( c e
r g es le li
Flexfield Definition check box.
Ge ferab
Setting Validation Information for Segments
k
la rans
• Assign a value set to each segment.
a
M n-t
• Always enable the flexfield security check box for each segment.
no
• Enter a default value from the list of values, or enter another value.
• Select the Required check box and the Displayed check box.
• Selecting Different Sizes for the Segment Display
• Choose the number of characters to be displayed for the flexfield segment value and its
description in the Display Size and Description Size fields.
• In the Concatenated Description Size field, choose the number of characters to be
displayed for each segment value description that makes up the account combination.
Assigning Flexfield Qualifiers
• In the Flexfield Qualifiers window, assign qualifiers to individual accounting key flexfield
segments:
- Natural Account: Each Accounting Flexfield structure must contain only one natural
account segment. When setting up the values, you will indicate the type of account as
Asset, Liability, Owner's Equity, Revenue, or Expense.
- Balancing Account: Each structure must contain only one balancing segment. Oracle
General Ledger ensures that all journals balance for each balancing segment.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 39
Chapter 3 - page 87
EMAK
- Cost Center: This segment is required for Oracle Assets. The cost center segment is
used in many Oracle Assets reports and by Oracle Workflow to generate account
numbers. In addition, Oracle Projects and Oracle Purchasing also utilize the cost
center segment.
- Intercompany: General Ledger automatically uses the intercompany segment in the
account code combination to track intercompany transactions within a single ledger.
This segment has the same value set and the same values as the balancing segment.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 40
Chapter 3 - page 88
EMAK
Defining Segment Values

s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Segment
a n s
Defining
M n-t r Values
o Segment Values window to enter values for each segment you create. These are the
Usenthe
values that you use when building your account code combinations.
(N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Values
Note: Create the segments and account structure before performing this step.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 41
Chapter 3 - page 89
EMAK
Populating Segment Value Attributes

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rSegment
a n s
Populating
M n-t Value Attributes
Asn o enter values for a value set in the Segment Values window, you also set the attributes
you
for those values.
If the value set has the type Translatable Independent or Translatable Dependent, the
Translated Value field is enabled and users can select the Translation icon to update the
translated value in all installed languages.
Select Parent to specify a parent value (an account segment value that references a number of
other segment values called child values). When entering parent values, optionally enter a
rollup group name and/or level.
Enable or disable values by selecting the enabled check box or by using the Date From and To
fields.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 42
Chapter 3 - page 90
EMAK
Segment Qualifiers
s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Qualifiers
Segment
M n-t r
o you define a segment value, you must also assign qualifiers for that value to
•nWhen
determine the account type, whether budgeting is allowed, whether posting is allowed, and
other information specific to that segment value. You must enter segment qualifier
information whenever you define segment values for any value set used to create an
Accounting Flexfield combination. Segment qualifiers vary by segment.
You can define the following segment qualifiers:
Allow Budgeting:
• Enter Yes to perform detailed budgeting for accounts with this segment value. If set to No,
you cannot assign accounts with this segment value to budget organizations and you
cannot define budget formulas for those accounts. If you are defining a parent segment
value, you must enter No.
Allow Posting:
• If set to No, you cannot use accounts with this segment value to enter journals. If you are
defining a parent segment value, you must enter No because you cannot not post to parent
accounts.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 43
Chapter 3 - page 91
EMAK
Account Type:
• Defines the account type for the natural account segment value. You can enter only valid
account types. Enter the type of proprietary account (Asset, Liability, Owners' Equity,
Revenue, or Expense) or enter the type of budget account (Budgetary Dr or Budgetary
Cr). For statistical accounts, enter either Asset, Liability, or Owners' Equity. If you choose
an account type of Revenue or Expense for a statistical account segment value, your
statistical balance zeros-out at the end of the fiscal year. The default for this field is
Expense.
To change the Account Type for a value that has not been used, unfreeze all Accounting
Flexfield structures that reference the natural account segment. Changing the account type only
affects new accounts created after this change is made. Note: Please consult Oracle Support
before making a change to a value that has been used or has a balance to prevent problems.
Third Party Control Account:
• Enter Payables, Receivables, or Yes for the Third Party Control Account to designate the
s a
account as a Control Account. Access to this account will be restricted to Oracle Payables,
h a
Receivables, and Inventory, for which Subledger Accounting automatically creates
) ฺ
o m
detailed balances. If you do not specify the account as a control account, you will be able
o
to use the account for all Oracle Applications.
o ฺc uide
Reconciliation Flag: y ah ent G
0 0@ Stud
• Enter Yes for Reconciliation Flag to allow reconciliation for natural accounts that should
0
balance to zero.
e s 2 this
e rg use
Note: When you define a value as a Parent, you can not budget or post to this value even if you
g
l a k_ e to
select the Budget Entry Allowed and Posting Allowed check boxes.
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 44
Chapter 3 - page 92
EMAK
Control Accounts
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Accounts
a n s
Control
M n-t r
no accounts are General Ledger accounts accessed from Oracle Payables, Receivables,
Control
and Inventory, for which Subledger Accounting automatically creates detailed balances.
Control Accounts prevent users from entering data from unauthorized sources.
Benefits
• Improved Data Integrity
- Only allow approved source to post to an account
• Streamlined Reconciliation
- Enforce consistency between source system and GL account balance
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 45
Chapter 3 - page 93
EMAK
Control Accounts Setup and Process

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Accounts
a n s
Control
M n-t r Setup and Process
o defining your natural account segment values, you can designate an account as a
•nWhen
control account using the qualifier in the segment values window.
• You can select the journal source from which data can originate for each control account.
• SLA and GL will verify that only data from the specified source can be posted to the
control account.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 46
Chapter 3 - page 94
EMAK
Defining Hierarchies
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Hierarchies
Defining
M n-t r
noSegment Values
Child
• Post journals and enter budgets directly to child segment values. Assign ranges of children
to parents.
Parent Segment Values
• Use parents to sum the balances of associated child accounts. Any segment that has
children beneath it - even if that segment has its own parent above it - is considered a
parent by Oracle General Ledger. You cannot post journals or enter budgets directly for
parent segment values. Assign ranges of child values to parent values to create
summations for running reports, MassAllocations, or MassBudgeting.
• You can create parent segment values for independent segments, but there are limitations
when used with dependent segments. The Dependent validation type limits using parent
values with MassAllocations, MassBudgeting, and Financial Statement Generator (FSG).
The only parent value available for dependent segments is an all inclusive parent that
includes all the values of the value set.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 47
Chapter 3 - page 95
EMAK
Technical Note:
• Summary accounts may use the segment value 'T' in one or more of the segments,
therefore, define the segment value "T" for every Accounting Flexfield segment if you are
planning to create summary accounts. The value 'T' is also a parent value even though its
children are not specifically assigned. Note: Char must be used as the format type for all
segments of the accounting key flexfields because of the value "T".
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 48
Chapter 3 - page 96
EMAK
Working with Ranges

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la witha n s
Working
M n-t r Ranges
o the ranges of child values for each parent.
•nEnter
• Specify a range type of Child or Parent.
• When using the Child type, any child values that fall within the specified range are
considered children of the parent value.
• When using the Parent type, any parent values that fall within the specified range are
considered children of the parent value.
Moving Ranges
• Move a range of child values from one parent to another parent value.
• If the child moved is also a parent, its children are moved automatically.
Viewing Hierarchies
• View the hierarchy structure to which the selected value belongs.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 49
Chapter 3 - page 97
EMAK
Account Hierarchies
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Hierarchies
Account
M n-t r
o various flexible parent/child account hierarchies to view your business according to
•nUse
product lines, geographical regions, organizational lines, or any other combination of
factors you deem important.
• Create your hierarchy with as many vertical and horizontal levels as you need to
effectively analyze your business or business segment. It is better to create new parent
structures than to modify existing structures because changes can effect historical
reporting.
Note: Oracle General Ledger treats all segment values that have the Parent check box selected
as parents even if they don't have children assigned and does not allow direct posting or
budgeting to these values.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 50
Chapter 3 - page 98
EMAK
Account Hierarchy Manager

s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Hierarchies
Planning
M n-t r
noyour hierarchies carefully. When you create and save Parent and Child segment values,
Plan
they become permanent. You cannot change or delete Parent or Child segment values using the
Account Hierarchy Manager or Oracle General Ledger. You can only disable them. Disabled
segment values are displayed in the Account Hierarchy Manager as grayed out.
If you are creating large hierarchies, creating numerous parents and children, or managing the
attributes of many parents and children, you can use a spreadsheet template as a planning aid.
Model your spreadsheet template after the grid format in the Attributes window. Enter the
appropriate data in the cells. You can use your template to guide you when making changes in
the Account Hierarchy Manager. You can copy and paste entries from your template into the
Attributes window, one field at a time for the Value, Description, From, and To fields. The
date format you enter in your template must follow the MM–DD–YYYY format.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 51
Chapter 3 - page 99
EMAK
Account Hierarchy Manager—Security

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Hierarchy
a n s
Account
M n-t r Manager—Security
o > Accounts > Manager
(N)nSetup
The Account Hierarchy Manager has security rules that work together. You can control read
only or read/write access and control access to hierarchies, segment values, and charts of
accounts.
• Read Only, Read/Write Security
- Read Only – Disables you from modifying or saving hierarchies or segment values
and parameters. You can only query, view hierarchy, view details, and export to a tab
delimited files. Read Only is displayed in the title bar of the Account Hierarchy
Manager.
- Read/Write Security – Gives you read/write access to all segment values in the Chart
of Accounts. Segment Value Security may limit the segment values you can access.
• Segment Value Security—An Oracle Applications feature that lets you exclude a segment
value or ranges of segment values for a specific user responsibility. Segment Value
Security is extended to the Account Hierarchy Manager.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 52
Chapter 3 - page 100

EMAK
• Chart of Accounts Security—You have access to those charts of accounts associated with
your user responsibility. If you need access to charts of accounts not available to you, see
your system administrator.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 53

EMAK
Defining an Accounting Calendar

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la anrAccounting
Defining
M n-t Calendar
no Calendar Considerations
Account
• Define at least one year at a time. By setting up your periods in advance, you can reduce
the amount of period maintenance at the start of each accounting period.
• Foreign currency translations cannot be performed in the initial period opened for your
ledger.
• Choose the earliest period carefully. After you open the first accounting period, prior
periods cannot be opened.
• Set up the number of periods you want to budget for, up to a maximum of 60 periods.
• When the next accounting period is opened, Oracle General Ledger rolls account balances
forward to that period.
How to Define an Accounting Calendar
(N) Setup > Financials > Calendar > Accounting
• Open the Accounting Calendar window
• Enter the following information:
- Calendar: Accounting Demo
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 54

EMAK
- Description: Standard Calendar

• Enter the following information to add the periods that make up the calendar year:
Prefix Type Year Quarter Num From To Name
Jan Month 2003 1 1 01-JAN-2003 31-JAN-2003 Jan-03
Feb Month 2003 1 2 01-FEB-2003 28-FEB-2003 Feb-03
• Notice the Adjustment box to designate an adjusting period.

• Save your work
• Close the Accounting Calendar window. A decision window appears whenever you close
the Accounting Calendar window after creating or editing a calendar. Select the Current
button to validate the calendar you just created.
• (B) OK
• Find your request in the Requests window and select the View Output button to find out if
there were any errors in the calendar you just created
s a
• The Calendar Validation Report identifies if there are missing periods for this calendar
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 55

EMAK
Defining Period Types

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Period
a n s
Defining r
M n-t Types
no General Ledger uses the year type to determine the year to assign to a period name in
Oracle
the accounting period system. When defining new period types:
• Choose Calendar to use the year in which an accounting period begins for the period
name.
• Choose Fiscal to use the year in which your fiscal year ends for the period name.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 56

EMAK
Defining Your First Accounting Period

s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Youra n s
Defining
M n-t r First Accounting Period
noyou define a new ledger, choose carefully the first accounting period you want to open.
When
Once you open your first accounting period, Oracle General Ledger does not allow you to open
prior accounting periods.
Choosing whether to include an adjusting period or not in your calendar is a very important
decision. You can have an unlimited number of adjusting periods. Typically, the last day of the
fiscal year is used as an adjusting period to perform adjusting and closing journal entries. Once
you begin using your accounting calendar, you cannot change its structure to remove or add an
adjusting period.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 57

EMAK
Accounting Period Statuses

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rPeriod
a n s
Accounting
M n-t Statuses
noOpened:
Never
• You cannot enter or post journals.
Future Enterable:
• You can enter journals, but you cannot post. The number of future enterable periods is a
fixed number defined in the Ledger window. You can change the number of Future
Enterable periods at any time.
Open:
• You can enter and post journals to any open period. An unlimited number of periods can
be open, but doing so may slow the posting process and can confuse users entering
journals.
Closed:
• You must reopen Closed periods before you can post journals. You should manually close
periods after finishing your month-end processing.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 58

EMAK
Permanently Closed:
• Permanently Closed periods cannot be reopened. This status is required to archive and
purge data.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 59

EMAK
Calendar Auditing
s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Auditing
a n s
Calendar
M n-t r
no General Ledger can automatically audit your accounting calendars to check for
Oracle
common setup errors. This feature strengthens controls during implementation and prevents
potential processing problems related to invalid calendar definitions.
When you use the Accounting Calendar window to enter periods, the system only performs
online checking of errors such as the wrong number of days assigned to a period or
nonadjusting periods that have overlapping days.
When you exit the Calendar window, the Calendar Auditing program automatically produces a
report that clearly outlines calendar definition violations such as date omissions, overlapping
nonadjusting periods, and nonsequential periods.
The Calendar Validation report prints the error description, years, periods, or dates that violate
the GL calendar definition when you create a calendar or add accounting periods to your
calendar.
Use the Calendar Validation Report to identify errors in your calendar that may interfere with
the proper operation of Oracle General Ledger.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 60

EMAK
Enabling Currencies
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Currencies
Enabling
M n-t r
o > Currencies > Define
(N)nSetup
1. To Enable or Disable a Currency, open the Currencies window.
2. In the currencies window, query all existing records by using the CTRL + F11 keys.
3. Select any existing currency that has not been enabled. Scroll to the right and select the
Enabled check box to enable the currency.
4. Save your work.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 61

EMAK
Enabling Account Combinations

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Account
a n s
Enabling
M n-t r Combinations
o setting for an account code combination is enabled. Once created, an account code
Thendefault
combination cannot be deleted. To discontinue using an account code combination, simply
deselect the Enabled check box for the account. You can also use the effective date to enable or
disable the combination. For example, if you have a new department as of January 1, 2002, you
can create an account code combination with an effective date of 01-JAN-2002 and the account
combination becomes enabled on that date. This means you have the flexibility to create the
account combinations in advance.
Additionally, you can control the following attributes from the GL Accounts window:
• Preserved
• Type
• Effective Dates
• Allow Posting
• Allow Budgeting
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 62

EMAK
Segment Value Inheritance

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Value
a n s
Segment
M n-t r Inheritance
no of Segment Value Inheritance
Overview
• Oracle General Ledger eases chart of accounts maintenance by automatically replicating
changes to segment value attributes of the account code combinations that contain that
segment value. For example, if you enable a particular cost center segment value that had
been disabled previously, you can run the Segment Value Inheritance program so that all
account code combinations containing that cost center are automatically re-enabled. You
can also prevent selected account code combinations from being affected by segment
value attribute changes by selecting the Preserved check box in the GL Accounts window.
Using the Segment Value Inheritance Program
• To use the Segment Value Inheritance program:
- Enable or disable a segment or change other attributes in the Segment Values
window.
- Run the Segment Value Inheritance program to change the attributes on all account
code combinations that contain the segment.
- Use the Segment Value Inheritance Exception Report to view the account code
combinations that have been changed.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 63

EMAK
• Individual segment value attributes override account code combination attributes. To

protect account code combinations from changes when you run the Segment Value
Inheritance program, select the Preserved check box in the GL Accounts window.
• An account code combination is composed of several segment values. If these segment
values have conflicting settings with respect to being enabled, posting, budgeting, and
effective dates, the most restrictive of these settings for any of the individual segment
values applies to the account code combination when the program is run. If you disable a
segment value, the code combinations that contain that value will no longer be able to
used, even if the preserved check box is selected.
Note: You can also disable an account code combination in the GL Accounts window.
However, you must select or deselect the Enabled check box for each account combination
individually. This applies to other attributes such as budgeting and posting as well.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 64

EMAK
Troubleshooting Segment Value Inheritance

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ransSegment Value Inheritance
Troubleshooting
M n-t
no Flexfield Structure:
Accounting
• If you want to update another Accounting Flexfield structure, you must use the
responsibility for that structure. If you have multiple ledgers, you must have at least one
responsibility defined for each ledger. The segment value inheritance program only
updates one ledger, which is the one assigned to the responsibility of the user launching
the program. If multiple ledgers need to be updated, you must launch the program multiple
times, each time from a different responsibility.
Table Validation:
• If the Segment Value Inheritance program is run for a chart of accounts that contains a
table validated value set, the columns LAST_UPDATE_DATE and CREATION_DATE
must be in the table used by the table validated value set. If the table does not have these
columns, then the Segment Value Inheritance program cannot determine which segment
values attributes have changed since its last run and assumes that no segment value has
changed in this value set.
• The Segment Value Inheritance program prints a warning message in the report.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 65

EMAK
• The program continues the inheritance process for other segments and generates a warning
when the program is completed.
Segment Value Inheritance and Flexfield Security
• Segment value inheritance and flexfield security are different and unrelated.
• You can use flexfield security to enable specific users to use a segment value and block
other users from using the same value.

• Segment value inheritance finds code combinations using a segment value and transfers
the segment value attributes to the code combinations.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 66

EMAK
Defining Flexfield Security Rules

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Flexfield
Defining
M n-t r Security Rules
o prohibit certain users from accessing specific segment values, you can define flexfield
•nTo
security rules and assign those rules to the responsibility of the restricted users. For
example, you can create a security rule that grants a user access only to his or her own
department.
• Accounting Flexfield segment values must pass every assigned flexfield security rule for a
user's responsibility before the value can be selected by the user.
How to Define Security Rules
(N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Validation > Security > Define
1. In the Find Key Flexfield Segment window, enter:
- Title Accounting Flexfield
- Structure Demo Accounting Flex
- Segment Company
2. Select the Find button.
3. Enter the parameters for the security rule.
4. In the Security Rules region:
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 67

EMAK
- Name Demo FFS

- Description Company Not Valid for Responsibility
- Message Demo FFS – Company not valid for responsibility
5. In the Security Rules Elements region:
- Include 00 – 99
- Exclude 00 - 00
6. Save your work.
7. Select the Assign button and assign the rule to:
- Application Oracle General Ledger
- Responsibility Demo Vision Operations, USA
- Name Demo FFS
8. Save your work.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 68

EMAK
Using Dynamic Insertion

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laDynamic
a n s
Using r
M n-t Insertion
no the Allow Dynamic Inserts Option
Setting
• You have the option of allowing account combinations to be added automatically as you
enter them in transactions, including when you define a ledger. This option is controlled
by the Allow Dynamic Inserts check box located on the Key Flexfield Segments window.
Alternately, you can require all accounts to be define manually in the Accounts
Combinations window.
• Frequently, companies enable dynamic insertion while they are entering historical data
from a legacy system. They then disable the feature to ensure tighter control over the
creation of new account combinations.
Note: If you are defining an Accounting Flexfield for Oracle Projects, you must define your
segment with the Allow Dynamic Inserts option set to Yes. For more information, refer to the
Oracle Projects User Guide.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 69

EMAK
Defining Cross-Validation Rules

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Cross-Validation
Defining
M n-t r Rules
no
Cross-validation controls the combinations of values you can create when you are setting up
Accounting Flexfield combinations. A cross-validation rule defines whether a value of a
particular segment can be combined with specific values of other segments. Cross-validation is
different from segment validation, which controls the values you can enter for a particular
segment.
You use cross-validation rules to prevent the creation of combinations that should never exist
(combinations with values that should not coexist in the same combination). For example, you
can assign rules to prevent the combination of a product with administrative departments.
Defining and Revising Cross-Validation Rules
• Because cross-validation rules validate only new accounts, you should define and enable
them prior to entering accounts.
• Revise cross-validation rules at any time, but remember that they only prevent the creation
of new invalid account combinations.
Combinations of Segment Values
• New accounts must pass every enabled cross-validation rule to be valid.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 70

EMAK
• Cross-validation rules do not affect existing accounts.

• Using Cross-Validation with Dynamic Insertion
• Enable dynamic insertion in the Key Flexfield Segments window to allow users to define
new account combinations of segment values.
• If dynamic insertion is not enabled, you can only enter new account combinations of
segment values using the GL Accounts window.

• Cross validation rules are important even if dynamic insertion is not enabled to prevent
creating invalid combinations accidentally.
Specifying Cross-Validation Rules
• To enter cross validation rules, navigate to the Cross Validation Rules window.
(N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Rules
• Enter the error message that should be displayed if the rule is violated. Include the name
of the rule in the error message for easy identification.
s a
• Enter the name of the segment most likely to cause this cross-validation rule to fail; Oracle
h
) ฺa
General Ledger moves the cursor to this segment whenever a new account combination
o m
ฺc uide
violates this cross-validation rule.
Defining Cross-Validation Rule Elements o o
y ah ent G
• Select Include or Exclude and specify a range of accounts for each rule.
0 0 0@ Stud
• Oracle General Ledger excludes all accounts that are not explicitly included.
e s 2 this
• Exclude rule elements always override Include rule elements. Therefore, create a universal
g e rg use
Include statement that includes all possible accounts. Then specify Exclude statements.
l a k_ e to
• Note: Defining many rules with few elements is generally much clearer than defining few
( m a ns
e
rules with many elements. For clarity, always contain one universal Include element and
c
r g es le li
one or more restricting Exclude elements.
Ge ferab
Note: To help you maintain your cross-validation rules, have your system administrator add the
k
la rans
following reports to your General Ledger responsibility:
a
M n-t
• Cross-Validation Rule Violation Report: This report provides a listing of all the
no previously-created flexfield combinations that violate your cross-validation rules. You can
also choose to have the report program actually disable the existing combinations that
violate your new rules.
• Cross-Validation Rules Listing Report: This report lists all the cross-validation rules that
exist for a particular flexfield structure. This is the information you define using the
Define Cross-Validation Rules form, presented in a multiple-rule format you can review
and keep for your records for a given flexfield structure.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 71

EMAK
Defining Shorthand Aliases

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Shorthand
Defining
M n-t r Aliases
no Aliases to Represent Accounts
Defining
• An alias can represent the value for a single segment, several segments or an entire
account combination.
• You can define an unlimited number of aliases to represent complete or partial accounts.
How to Create Aliases
(N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Aliases
1. In the Shorthand Aliases window, use the Find icon to find the Demo Accounting Flex
chart of accounts.
- Flexfield Title Accounting Flexfield
- Structure DEMO ACCOUNTING FLEX
2. Select the Enabled checkbox.
3. In the Max Alias Size field, enter 4.
4. In the Prompt field, enter Alias.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 72

EMAK
5. In the Aliases, Description tabbed region, enter:

- Alias Cash
- Template 01.100.1000
- Description Cash account for Cost Center 100
6. Save your work
7. Open the Key Flexfield Segments window.

(N) > Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Segments
8. Use the Find icon to locate:
- Flexfield Title Accounting Flexfield
9. From the Structures list, select Demo Accounting Flex.
10. Clear the Freeze Flexfield Definition check box. Select OK when the message box
appears.
s a
h a
11. Select the Freeze Flexfield Definition check box and select OK when the message box
) ฺ
appears.
o m
12. Save your work.
o o ฺc uide
Important Notes: y ah ent G
0 0@ Stud
• You cannot define a shorthand alias using invalid values.
0
s 2 this
• There is no validation process or checking of cross-validation rules when you define
e
shorthand aliases.
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
• After you define the first shorthand alias, you must unfreeze your flexfield and recompile
m a ns
it in order to be able to use your newly defined shorthand alias. This step is performed
( c e
r g es le li
only once.
Ge ferab
• The Flexfields: Shorthand Entry Profile Option must be set to Yes before you can use your
k
a la rans
shorthand aliases. This profile option can be set by the user or system administrator.
M n-t
• Caution: Do not define shorthand aliases for a small number of accounts. It is inefficient.
no
• Entering Aliases When Entering Accounts
• When you invoke the account list of values window, the shorthand window is displayed.
• You can enter a partial shorthand alias or skip the shorthand window to open the
Accounting Flexfield window.
• After you enter a partial alias, the Accounting Flexfield window displays the segment
values represented by the alias. Change any segment values if desired.
• If you entered an alias that represented an entire accounting combination, it fills in the
values and move you to the next field in the window.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 73

EMAK
Overview of Account Hierarchy Manager

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la ofraAccount
Overview
M n-t Hierarchy Manager
nothe Account Hierarchy Manager you can:
With
• Graphically create, maintain, and review account structure hierarchies
• Define new parent and child segment values, as well as change parent/child dependencies
• Create new rollup groups from the Account Hierarchy Manager and have your changes
reflected automatically in both the Key Segment Values and Rollup Groups windows
Planning Hierarchies
Plan your hierarchies carefully. When you create and save Parent and Child segment values,
they become permanent. You cannot change or delete Parent or Child segment values using the
Account Hierarchy Manager or Oracle General Ledger. You can only disable them. Disabled
segment values are displayed in the Account Hierarchy Manager as grayed out.
If you are creating large hierarchies, creating numerous parents and children, or managing the
attributes of many parents and children, you can use a spreadsheet template as a planning aid.
Model your spreadsheet template after the grid format in the Attributes window. Enter the
appropriate data in the cells. You can use your template to guide you when making changes in
the Account Hierarchy Manager. You can copy and paste entries from your template into the
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 74

EMAK
Attributes window, one field at a time for the Value, Description, From, and To fields. The
date format you enter in your template must follow the MM–DD–YYYY format.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 75

EMAK
Integrating with Oracle General Ledger

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rwith
a n s
Integrating
M n-t Oracle General Ledger
no Hierarchy Manager is fully integrated with Oracle General Ledger. You can create
Account
and manage values and hierarchies for your Accounting Flexfields using the Account
Hierarchy Manager just as you can in General Ledger. All changes made in Account Hierarchy
Manager are reflected in GL upon saving and your entire chart of accounts is available in
Account Hierarchy Manager. Working with account structures and hierarchies in Account
Hierarchy Manager is easy and intuitive because of the graphical interface. In addition,
performing what-if manipulations for account structures is a simple process using the Account
Hierarchy Manager.
You can use Account Hierarchy Manager in conjunction with GL. First, set up the basic
account framework in General Ledger by defining value sets, the account structure, segment
qualifiers, and the order of the segments. Then use the Account Hierarchy Manager to add
values and relationships. You will find setting up your chart of accounts to be more efficient
this way.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 76

EMAK
Using the Account Hierarchy Toolbar

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a lathe Account
a n s
Using
M n-t r Hierarchy Toolbar
no a Hierarchy
Building
To build a hierarchy, select a parent value from the Values List window and choose the View
Hierarchy button from the toolbar. The parent value and all its children are displayed in the
Hierarchy window.
To continue building a hierarchy, select additional values from the Values List window, then
drag and drop them in the Hierarchy window. Any new values must be added to existing parent
values in the hierarchy window. For example, you can select a child value, drag it to the
Hierarchy window, then drop it onto any parent value. You can also select a parent value, drag it
to the Hierarchy window, and drop it on any parent value.
However, there are instances when you cannot drop a selected value onto an existing value in the
hierarchy diagram. For example, you cannot drop a child value onto another child value. The
Account Hierarchy Manager will prevent you from completing the drag and drop in these
instances.
To remove a value from a hierarchy, select it and choose Remove from the right-click mouse
menu.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 77

EMAK
Account Hierarchy Manager Segment Symbols

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Hierarchy
a n s
Account
M n-t r Manager Segment Symbols
no Segment Values and Hierarchies
Displaying
The Account Hierarchy Manager interface consists of multiple windows to help you find,
manage, and create hierarchies.
Chart of Accounts - Segments Window
The Chart of Accounts - Segments window lists the Chart of Accounts you can access subject
to Chart of Accounts Security.
Displaying Parents and Children in a Graphical Hierarchy
1. Expand any Chart of Accounts folder to view the individual segments, such as Company,
Department, Account, etc.
2. Highlight a specific segment and choose Find in the Query Values window.
The window changes to the Values List window and displays all the Parent and Child
values for that segment.
3. Highlight any parent value and choose the View Hierarchy button. The Hierarchy window
appears. Parent and Child values are displayed in a graphical hierarchy.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 78

EMAK
Query Values Window

Enter search criteria in the Query Values window to search for existing segment values. Values
you can access are subject to Segment Value Security. Criteria entered in the Parent and Child
tabs work together in your search. The Parent and Child tabs have Values, Status, and Dates
tabs to help you limit your query. You can sort the results of your search by Value or
Description.
Values List Window
Expand a Chart of Accounts, select a Segment and choose Find in the Query Values window.
The Account Hierarchy Manager displays 100 segment values at a time in the Values Detail
window. You can select arrows to scroll through the list.
Values Detail Window
The Account Hierarchy Manager displays your hierarchies and attributes in two windows—
Account Values Detail window and Hierarchy window. The title of the Values Detail window
is dynamic to reflect the segment you are working with. For example, if you highlight a parent
s a
h
) ฺa
value for the account segment in the Account Values window and choose the View Hierarchy
button from the toolbar, the parent and its children appear in the Hierarchy and Attributes sub
o m
o o ฺc uide
windows of the Account Values Detail window. The displayed title of the Values Detail
ah ent G
window, in this example, is Account Values Detail. The Hierarchy window displays your
y
hierarchies graphically. From a Hierarchy window, you can build, modify, and view account
0 0@ Stud
hierarchies. The Attributes window lists the attributes of segment values displayed in the
0
s 2 this
Hierarchy window. Attributes are: Description, Rollup Group, Account Type, Effective Date
e
g e rg use
Ranges, Enabled, Budgeting Allowed, and Posting Allowed.
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 79

EMAK
Parent Levels in an Account Hierarchy

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laLevels a n s
Parent
M n-t r in Account Hierarchy
Asn o
illustrated in the diagram, a parent value can be a child of a higher level parent. For
example, in the diagram, parent value 3110 has two child segment values, 3111 and 3115. The
parent is itself a child of the higher level parent value 3100, which also includes the child
values 3150 and 3160. Parent value 3100 is, in turn, a child of the topmost parent value, 3000,
which also includes the lower level parent values 3200 and 3300, as well as all of their child
values.
When you select a parent level in the Account Hierarchy Manager, you are selecting the parent
segment value plus all of its child values, which include lower level parents and their
associated child values. For example, if you select the parent value 3300 from the hierarchy
shown in the diagram, you are selecting the values 3300, 3310, 3311, 3315, and 3350.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 80

EMAK
Creating New Child Values

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la New a n s
Creating
M n-t r Child Values
o Account Hierarchy Manager to define a new segment value by entering attributes for a
Usenthe
new child value. The new value must comply with the defined format of the segment's value
set.
To create a new child segment value for your hierarchy, from the Chart of Accounts -
Segments window select the Chart of Accounts and Segment for the existing hierarchy you
want to work with. Choose Find in the Query Values window, and choose New Child from the
Edit menu. The Child Attributes window appears. In the Child Attributes window, enter a new
Segment Value. The Account Hierarchy Manager validates the value when you close the Child
Attributes window.
Once you create and save a new child segment value, you cannot delete it. To disable the
segment value at any time, uncheck the Enable check box in the Child Attributes window.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 81

EMAK
Ledger Sets
s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laSetsrans
Ledger
M n-t
no Sets enable you to group multiple ledgers that share the same COA and calendar
Ledger
combination. Essentially, Ledger Sets allow you to treat multiple ledgers as one. For example,
you can open and close periods for multiple ledgers in a ledger set in a single submission by
submitting the new Open and Close Periods programs from the Submit Request form.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 82

EMAK
Data Access Sets

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la raSets
n s
Data Access
M n-t
noAccess Sets enable you to specify read only or read and write access for a legal entity,
Data
ledger, balancing segment value or management segment value.
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 83

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 84

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 85

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Ledger
Chapter 3 - Page 86

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
Basic Journaly ah Entries
n t G
0 0 @ tude
e s 20 4 this S
Chapter
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Basic Journal Entries

Chapter 4 - Page 1

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 2

EMAK

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 3

EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 4

EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 5

EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 6

EMAK
Journal Entries and the Accounting Cycle

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Entries
a n s
Journal r
M n-t and the Accounting Cycle
no entries are an integral part of the accounting cycle:
Journal
• Open period
• Create functional and foreign journal entries.
• Reverse journal entries
• Post
• Review and correct balances
• Revalue foreign currency balances
• Translate foreign currency balances
• Consolidate ledgers
• Review and correct balances
• Run accounting reports
• Close the accounting period

Chapter 4 - Page 7

EMAK
Integrating Journal Entries in Oracle eBusiness

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rJournal
a n s
Integrating
M n-t Entries in Oracle eBusiness
no entries transfer accounting transactions to General Ledger for reporting and analysis.
Journal
You can integrate the following subledgers with Oracle General Ledger:
• Purchasing: Accrual of receipts not invoiced, purchase orders, final close cancellations
• Payables: Invoices, payments, realized gain and loss, invoice price variance
• Assets: Capital asset additions, cost adjustments, transfers, retirements, depreciation,
reclassifications, also construction in process
• Work In Process: Material issues or backflush to WIP, completions, returns, resource and
overhead transactions, cost updates
• Inventory: Inventory, cost of goods sold (COGS), cycle count and physical inventory
adjustments, receiving transactions, delivery transactions, intercompany transfers, sales
order issues, internal requisitions, subinventory transfers
• Projects: Cost distribution of labor and non-labor, revenue
• Receivables: Invoices, payments, adjustments, debit memos, credit memos, cash,
chargebacks, realized gain and loss
• Payroll: Salary, deductions and taxes

Chapter 4 - Page 8

EMAK
Performing Journal Entry Functions

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rJournal
a n s
Performing
M n-t Entry Functions
noOracle General Ledger, Oracle subledgers, and Oracle Web ADI, you can perform the
Using
following journal entry functions:
• Create journal entries in Oracle General Ledger or use Web ADI to enter journals from a
spreadsheet.
• Import journal entries
• Post journal entries
• Inquire on account information and journal entries
• Drill down to subledgers
• Run reports
• Reverse journal entries

Chapter 4 - Page 9

EMAK
Journal Entry Types

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Entry
a n s
Journal
M n-t r Types
no Oracle General Ledger, you can work with the following types of journal entries:
Within
• Manual Journal Entries: The basic journal entry type is used for most accounting
transactions. Examples include adjustments and reclassifications.
• Reversing Journal Entries: Reversing journal entries are created by reversing an existing
journal entry. You can reverse any journal entry and post it to the current or any future
open accounting period.
• Recurring Journal Entries: Recurring journal entries are defined once, then are repeated
for each subsequent accounting period you generate. You can use recurring journal entries
to define automatic consolidating and eliminating entries. Examples include intercompany
debt, bad debt expense, and periodic accruals.
• MassAllocations: MassAllocations are journal entries that utilize a single journal entry
formula to allocate balances across a group of cost centers, departments, divisions or other
segments. Examples include rent expense allocated by headcount or administrative costs
allocated by machine labor hours.

Chapter 4 - Page 10

EMAK
Journal Creation Methods

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Creation
a n s
Journal
M n-t r Methods
no Journal Entries
Manual
• Organization Need: Create adjusting journal.
• Procedure: Enter debits, credits, and accruals manually.
• Reversing Entries
• Organization Need: Reverse errors and revaluation journals.
• Procedure: Reverse the journal encumbrance and accrual amounts of a preexisting journal
entry.
• Recurring Entries
• Organization Need: Create journals using fixed variable amounts and complex formulas.
Create multiple journal entries with the same or similar information.
• Procedure: Create journals using skeleton, standard, or formula template.
• MassAllocations
• Organization Need: Allocate from one account to many by using a single formula.
• Procedure: Calculate journals by using an allocation formula.

Chapter 4 - Page 11

EMAK
• Journal Import
• Organization Need: Integrate Oracle General Ledger with other applications.
• Procedure: Import journal entry information from feeder systems.
• Journal Wizard
• Organization Need: Integrate Oracle General Ledger with an Excel spreadsheet for journal
creation.
• Procedure: Upload journal entries from an Excel spreadsheet.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 12

EMAK
Journal Components
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Components
Journal
M n-t r
nojournal entry belongs to a batch. You create a batch of journal entries by entering a
Every
name, control total and description for the batch. This step is optional. If you do not enter batch
information, Oracle General Ledger automatically creates one batch for each journal entry,
defaulting the name and the latest open period.
• All journal entries in a batch share the same period.
• Entering a batch control total and description are optional.
• If you do not enter a batch name, you must recall the journal entry by date.
• Batch information is stored in the GL_JE_BATCHES table.
Note: Most companies use standard naming conventions for batches and journals to easily
identify who entered the journal and the purpose of the journal entries. An example would be:
Accrual <Initials of the person who entered the journal> today's date.
Journal Header Information
• The header information identifies common details for a single journal entry, such as name,
effective date, source, category, currency, description, and control total.

Chapter 4 - Page 13

EMAK
Group related lines into journal entries

• All lines in a journal entry must share the same currency and category.
• If no journal entry-level information is entered, Oracle General Ledger assigns a default
name, category, and the functional currency.
• Header information is stored in the GL_JE_HEADERS table.
Journal Line Information

• Journal lines specify the accounting information for the journal entry.
• Total debits must equal total credits for a journal entry for all journal entries except budget
journal entries and statistical journal entries.
• Description for each line can be entered optionally.
• Information for journal entry lines is stored in the GL_JE_LINES table.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 14

EMAK
Grouping Journals into Batches

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Journals
Grouping
M n-t r into Batches
o use of journal batches is optional. If desired, you can enter a journal directly without
•nThe
creating a batch by selecting New Journal in the Find Journals window. A batch name is
created for you using the source combined with a batch ID and system date as in Manual
<BatchID><Date>.
• Batches can contain an unlimited number of journal entries.
• All journal entries in a batch must share the same accounting period. You can enter
journals only in a current or future enterable accounting period.
Note: If you enter a period prior to the current accounting period and the user profile Journals:
Enable Prior Period Notification is set to Yes, General Ledger displays a message indicating
that you are entering a prior period journal.
• If you post one journal entry, the entire batch posts.
• When using the reversing functionality, you can choose to reverse all the entries in a batch
or just one journal.
• You can post journal entries with unbalanced debits and credits if Suspense posting is
enabled. The difference is posted to the suspense account. If suspense posing is not

Chapter 4 - Page 15

EMAK
enabled, you cannot post an unbalanced journal entry except for statistical or budget
entries which do not have to be balanced to post.
How to Create a Journal Batch
1. Open the Find Journals window.
(N) Journals > Enter (B) New Batch
2. Select the New Batch button. The Batch window appears.

3. Enter the following information:
Batch Demo Computer Purchases and Sales
Period Select the latest open period
Control Total 220000 (This field is optional)
4. Select the Journals button to enter a journal header and journal lines.
5. Enter the Journal Header information:
Journal Demo Computer Purchase
s a
Category Addition a
)h ฺ
Currency USD m
co uide
o ฺ
aho ent G
6. Enter the following journal lines:
Line Account Debit Credit y Description
10 01-000-1560-2113-000 85000
0 0 0@ Stud Computers and Software
20 01-000-1110-2113-000 e s 2 this
5000 Cash
30 01-000-2210-2113-000 g e rg use 80000 Accounts Payable
l a k_ e to
( m a select ns Yes to save the journal entry, even though there is a
7. Save. In the Decision c
window, e
r
control totalg es le li
violation.
8. In theG
e b the New icon to create a second journal entry within this batch.
raselect
k f e
Header level,
s header information:
a theafollowing
lEnter
a
9.
M n-t r n
no Name
Category
Demo Computer Sales
Revenue
Currency USD
10. Enter the following information for the second journal entry:
Line Account Debit Credit Description
10 01-000-1210-2113-000 135000 Accounts Receivable
20 01-420-4110-2113-000 135000 Revenue
11. Save your work.

Chapter 4 - Page 16

EMAK
Manual Journal Entries

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laJournal
a n s
Manual r
M n-t Entries
nofunctional currency appears as the default currency when you open the Enter Journals
Your
window.
• Foreign Currency Journal Entries
- To enter a foreign currency journal, specify the currency you want to use and enter
conversion information.
- Conversion type can be Spot, Corporate, User, or other defined type.
- Conversion date must be within the accounting period defined for the journal entry.
- Enter a conversion rate if you enter User as the conversion type.
• Statistical Journal Entries
- To enter a statistical journal entry, select STAT as the currency for the journal entry.
- Statistical journal entries can be "one-sided" entries. The debits do not need to equal
credits for the journals to post.
- Combined Currency and Statistical Amounts
- You can enter a statistical journal entry by itself or combined with currency journal
amounts.

Chapter 4 - Page 17

EMAK
- Set the Journals: Mix Statistical and Monetary profile option to Yes.
- Define a statistical unit of measure for any natural account segment values you want
to combine statistical and monetary journal entries.
- When entering the journal lines, use debit and credit amounts for any monetary
currency. In the Statistical Amounts region, enter the statistical quantity.
• Intercompany Journal Entries

- Enter the intercompany transaction. General Ledger automatically creates the
balancing intercompany journal lines based on the accounts you defined in the
Intercompany Accounts window.
How to Create a Manual Journal Entry
1. Open the Batch window.
(N) Journals > Enter (B) New Batch
2. Enter the Batch and Period.
3. (B) Journals s a
4. Enter data for the following fields: h
) ฺa
o m
Journal
o o ฺc uide
Period
y ah ent G
Category
0 0 0@ Stud
Currency
e s 2 this
Description
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
5. Enter journal line information.
m a
6. Save your work.
( ns
c e
r g es le li
7. Select Yes to close the message box telling you that the debits do not equal the credits.
k Ge ferab
One-sided journal entries can be posted when the currency is STAT.
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 18

EMAK
Performing Additional Journal Actions

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rAdditional
a n s
Performing
M n-t Journal Actions
Younocan use the More Actions window to perform additional journal activities.
Reverse Journal: You can reverse a journal entry or batch. Select a reversal period if prompted.
Select the reversal method: Switch Debit/Credit or Change Sign.
Change Period: Select this button to change the period of any entry.
Post: Select this button to launch the concurrent process to post a manual journal entry and
update account balances. Posting is available in the More Actions window only if the profile
option Journals: Allow Posting During Journal Entry is set to Yes.
Note: You can also post journal entries by navigating to the Post Journals window.
(N) Journals > Post.
Funds Action: If you enable budgetary control for a ledger, you have the following additional
actions available for manual journal entries:
• Check funds
• Reserve funds
• View results

Chapter 4 - Page 19

EMAK
Posting Journals
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Journals
a n s
Posting
M n-t r
nohave three methods to post journal batches.
You
Batch Posting: Navigate to the Post Journals window to post a group of journal batches.
(N) Journals > Post
Manual Posting: Select the More Actions button from either the Journals window or the Batch
window to post a journal batch at the time of entry. This option is available only if the profile
option Journals: Allow Posting During Journal Entry has been set to Yes. When you post
journals, Oracle General Ledger posts all journals in a batch. You cannot post individual
journal entries in a batch.
(N) Journals > Enter (B) More Actions
Automatic Posting: Run the AutoPost program to post journal batches automatically based on a
schedule you define.
(N) Setup > Journals > AutoPost
Posting Journal Batches
You can post actual, budget, and encumbrance journal batches.

Chapter 4 - Page 20

EMAK
The Posting Status for the batch must be Postable and the Period Status must be Open for the
following balance types:
• Actual: Open period
• Budget: Periods in an open budget year
• Encumbrance: Any period up to the last period in the latest encumbrance year
If applicable, check the Control Total for the journal entry batch. General Ledger does not post
journal batches if the total entered debits do not match the control total for the batch.
Correcting Batch Posting Errors
Review the batch to identify the posting error. Common explanations for unpostable batches
include:
• Control total violations
• Posting to unopened periods
• Unbalanced journal entries
s
Correct the specific error and post the batch from the More Actions window. a
h
) ฺa
Posting Status
o m
• Unposted
o o ฺc uide
• Pending
y ah ent G
• Processing
0 0 0@ Stud
• Selected for posting
e s 2 this
• Posted
g e rg use
• Error
l a k_ e to
( m a
How to Post Journal Entriesns
c e
g es le li
1. Open the Find Journal Batches window.
r
Ge ferab
(N) Journals > Enter
k
a la rans
2. (B) More Actions
M n-t
3. (B) Post
no4. Note the concurrent request ID number.
5. Select OK in the Note window.
6. Open the Post Journals window.
(N) Journals > Post
7. In the Find Journal Batches window, find your batch.
8. Select the check box.
9. (B) Post
10. Note the concurrent request ID number.
11. Select OK to close the Note window.

Chapter 4 - Page 21

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 22

EMAK
Data Access Set Impact to Posting

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 23

EMAK
Posting to a Prior Period

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la to araPrior
Posting
M n-t Period
nocan post journal entries to a prior accounting period, as well as to a prior fiscal year, as
You
long as the prior period is open. When you post to a prior period, General Ledger automatically
updates the beginning balances of all subsequent periods even if the period is closed. In
addition, if you post a journal entry into a prior year, General Ledger adjusts your retained
earnings balance for the effect on your income and expense accounts.
When you finalize your activity for an accounting period, simply close the period to prevent
the entry or posting of additional journal entries.
Displaying Warning Messages
To ensure that you do not accidentally enter a journal for a prior period, you can require
General Ledger to display a message whenever you try to enter a prior period journal. To use
this feature, have your system administrator set the profile option Journals: Enable Prior Period
Notification to Yes.
Having many accounting periods open affects the time required to run the posting program.
Therefore, keep the number of open accounting periods to a minimum. Also, minimizing the
number of open periods prevents errors in posting to an incorrect period.

Chapter 4 - Page 24

EMAK
You should run a Trial Balance Report whenever you post to a previous fiscal year to ensure
that your Retained Earnings account is properly reconciled.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 25

EMAK
Overview of AutoPost
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la ofraAutoPost
Overview
M n-t
Ton o journal batch posting, you can schedule automatic posting based on parameters
facilitate
you specify. You can define multiple criteria sets that include a range of journal effective dates
and multiple AutoPost priorities.
For example, suppose after running Journal Import, you routinely post journal entries from
Payables to record your payments. To automate posting these batches, you can define a set of
criteria to select all unposted journal entries with a source of Payables, a category of Payments,
and a balance type of Actual for all periods. You can then schedule the AutoPost program to
run at the beginning of each week. Oracle General Ledger automatically selects and posts your
Payables payment batches to update your cash balances.

Chapter 4 - Page 26

EMAK
Defining AutoPost Criteria Sets

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la AutoPost
a n s
Defining
M n-t r Criteria Sets
Younocan define multiple AutoPost criteria sets to automatically post journal entries. For each
criteria set, you can choose to select journal batches for posting based on:
• Journal source
• Journal category
• Balance type
• Period
• Effective date
You can set the priority of the criteria set. The priority number must be a value from 1 to 99,
where 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest. Batches with higher priorities are posted
first. You can use the same priority number more than once. You can also select whether all
priority sets are considered for posting or only sets with a specific priority number:
• Submit All Priorities in Order: Submits the batches for all of your AutoPost priorities in
the same AutoPost run based on priority number.
• Submit Only Priorities with Batches in Order: Submits batches with a specific priority
number only.

Chapter 4 - Page 27

EMAK
Note: Select this option when you need to balance the load on your concurrent manager. This
may be necessary since a single AutoPost request that contains multiple priorities can result in
numerous instances of the Posting program running concurrently. The load on the concurrent
manager is increased further if a large number of journal batches are selected by your AutoPost
priorities.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 28

EMAK
Running AutoPost
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la AutoPost
a n s
Running
M n-t r
noyou define an AutoPost criteria set, run the AutoPost program to select and post any
Once
journal batches that meet the specified criteria.
You can run the AutoPost program from:
• AutoPost Criteria Sets window: (N) Setup > Journal > AutoPost
• Submit Request window: Enter the AutoPost criteria set name in the Parameters window.
Review the AutoPost Execution Report to verify the journal batches selected for posting.

Chapter 4 - Page 29

EMAK
Performing Online Inquiries for Accounts and Journal Entries

s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rOnline
a n s
Performing
M n-t Inquiries for Accounts and Journal Entries
no General Ledger provides three windows to view detail and summary information for
Oracle
your account balances, journal entries, and subledger accounting transactions:
• Account Inquiry
• Journal Inquiry
• Journal Enter
Whether you start in the Journals window or the Account Inquiry window, you can take
advantage of the graphical view of underlying accounting information for your transactions by
accessing the T Account and Activity Summary windows. You can also drilldown to see the
subledger transactions that created the journal entries.

Chapter 4 - Page 30

EMAK
Performing Account Inquiry

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rAccount
Performing
M n-t Inquiry
o account inquiry feature to view actual, budget, and encumbrance account balances for
Usenthe
a specific period or periods in either entered or balance level reporting currencies.
You can select one of three buttons to access the type of account information you want to view:
• Show Balances: Displays PTD and YTD account balances by period for both detail and
summary accounts.
• Show Journal Details: Lists all the journal batches and entries that affect the account
balance. From here you can drill down to the full journal entry and subledger transaction.
• Show Variance: Displays actual vs. budget or encumbrance amounts and the variance for
PTD, QTD, YTD, and PJTD (project-to-date) time periods.
Note: The Account Inquiry window displays balances from posted journal entries. To get the
most up-to-date account balance information, be sure all journal entries are posted.
How to Perform Account Inquiry
1. Open the Account Inquiry window.
(N) Inquiry > Account
2. Enter the following selection criteria for Accounting Periods:

Chapter 4 - Page 31

EMAK
From JUN-03
To Current period
3. Accept the defaults for Currency and Primary Balance Type
4. In the Accounts region, use the Find Accounts window to enter a range of accounts:
Segment Low High
Account 2210 2210

Sub Account 0000 2113
5. Select account 01-000-2210-2113-000 and then select the Show Balances button.
6. In the Detail Balances window, put your cursor on the line for the current period. Select
the Journal Details button to view the journal information for this account.
7. Select the Show Full Journal button to drill down to the journal entry that created this
information.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 32

EMAK
Reviewing Balances with Account Inquiry

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Balances
a n s
Reviewing
M n-t r with Account Inquiry
noyou perform an account inquiry, you can navigate from summary account balances to
When
detail balances. You have several navigation options to move between summary and detail
information:
• From detail account balances, you can drill down to the journal entries that make up the
account balances or drill back up to the summary account balance.
• From the journal entry, you can drill further to review the subledger transaction by
selecting the Drilldown button, when available.
• If drilling down from a consolidated journal batch, you can drill further to see subsidiary
journal entry details and subledger transactions. The button, Drilldown to [subsidiary
ledger name], appears only if you are reviewing consolidated balances in your parent
ledger.

Chapter 4 - Page 33

EMAK
Reviewing Variances Between Account Balance Types

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Variances
a n s
Reviewing
M n-t r Between Account Balance Types
o > Account > (B) Show Variance
(N)nInquiry
You can compare balances between any primary and secondary account type, such as:
• Actual and budget
• Budget and budget
• Actual and encumbrance
You must specify a primary and secondary balance type and select a budget or encumbrance
type in order to compare balance amounts.

Chapter 4 - Page 34

EMAK
Drilling Down to Subledger Details

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laDown a n s
Drilling
M n-t r to Subledger Details
You nocan drill down from the Account Inquiry, Journal Entry, and Journal Inquiry windows.
• From the Account Inquiry window, drill down to the journal entry, then select the
Drilldown button, then the Show Transactions button.
• From the Journal Inquiry and Journals windows, review the journal entry and select an
account combination in the journal entry. Select Drilldown from the Tools menu.
You can only drill down to subledgers if the journal entry was generated from one of the
following Oracle subledgers: Payables, Receivables, Inventory, Assets (except depreciation),
Projects, Purchasing, and Work in Process.
• For Payables, you can see detailed information about payments and invoices.
• For Receivables, you can see detailed information about invoices, receipts, adjustments, or
cash applications.
• For Inventory, Assets (except Depreciation), Projects, Purchasing, and Work in Progress
you can see the detailed information about transactions.
Note: In order to drilldown to subledger transactions, you must enable the Import Journal
References option for each journal source in the Journal Sources window.

Chapter 4 - Page 35

EMAK
Note: If your implementation uses Multiple Organizations, you see only subledger transactions
that are associated with your current responsibility's organization (MO: Operating Unit profile
option). For more information, refer to the Oracle General Ledger User Guide.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 36

EMAK
T Accounts and Drilldown

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
TM ala trand
Accounts a nsDrilldown
-
nocannview journal entries or subledger accounting entries in a graphical format using the T
You
Account and Activity Summary windows.
You access these windows from:
Enter Journals Window
(N) Journals > Enter (B) Find (M) Tools > T Accounts (B) T Accounts
Journals Window
(N) Journals > Enter (B) Find (B) Review Journal (M) Tools > T Accounts (B) T Accounts
Journal Entry Inquiry Window
(N) Inquiry > Journal > (B) Find (M) Tools > T Accounts
Account Inquiry Window
(N) Inquiry > Account (B) Show Journal Details (M) Tools > T Account or
(N) Inquiry > Account (B) Show Journal Details (B) Drilldown > (B) Show Accounting
Transactions (B) T Accounts
Accounting information is viewable in two different formats that can be customized:

Chapter 4 - Page 37

EMAK
• T Accounts: Displays journal entries or subledger accounting entries in a graphical T

Account format including account, activity detail, net activity for the entry and account
balance information.
• Activity Summary: Displays journal entries and subledger entries in a trial balance format
including account, net activity for the entry, and account balance information.
The Activity Summary and T Accounts windows are for display purpose only. You cannot
update records from these windows.
Drilling Down to Subledgers
Using the Tools menu, you can also drilldown to originating transactions in Oracle subledgers.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 38

EMAK
Display Options Available While Viewing

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Options
a n s
Display
M n-t r Available While Viewing
o time you try to access the T Accounts or subledger accounting windows, the Options
Thenfirst
window appears. You can then specify which window opens the next time you choose to view
accounting information. You can set the T Accounts, Activity Summary, or Options window as
the default window.
Use the Options window to customize the T Accounts and Activity Summary windows to
display the exact information you want. You can choose to view:
• Accounting information by full accounting flexfield or summarized by account segment.
• Account description, balances, entered amounts, and activity in the T Accounts window.
• Account description, balances, entered amounts in the Activity Summary window.
• Debits and credits in separate columns or as a net amount in the Activity Summary
window.
The Options, T Accounts, and Activity Summary windows are all linked. From any of these
windows, you can access the other two windows by clicking the appropriate button.

Chapter 4 - Page 39

EMAK
T Accounts
s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
TM ala trans
Accounts
onT-Accounts window to view journal entries in a graphical T Account format. General
Usenthe
Ledger displays information for the journal entry, such as accounts, activity details, net activity
for the entry, and account balances in both entered and functional currency. Customize the
display to meet your inquiry needs.
How to Use T Accounts and Activity Summary
1. Enter Demo% in the Batch Name field and select the Find button to retrieve the Demo
Computer Purchase and Sales journal batch.
(N) Journals > Enter
2. Select the Review Journal button.
3. Select a journal line and navigate to the T Accounts window.
(M) Tools > T Accounts
4. In the Options window, select the Segment radio button in the Organize By region. Select
the Company and Account segments from the List of Values.
5. Select the T Accounts button to view a graphical t-account display of the accounting
information.

Chapter 4 - Page 40

EMAK
6. From the T Accounts window, select the Activity Summary button to view the same
information in a trial balance format.
7. Select the Options button to return to the Option window.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 41

EMAK
Activity Summary
s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Summary
a n s
Activity
M n-t r
o
ThenActivity Summary window contains a view of the accounting entry, summarized by
account in a trial balance format. This columnar layout groups debit and credit amounts by
account to provide a high-level view of the transaction.
In this window, you can:
• Display debits and credits in separate columns with separate columns for entered and
functional currency, or
• Display the net amount of debits and credits in one column.

Chapter 4 - Page 42

EMAK
Reversing Journal Entries

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Journal
a n s
Reversing
M n-t r Entries
nocan create reversing journal entries to reverse accruals, estimates, temporary adjustments
You
and reclassifications, or correct errors.
You can reverse a journal entry in two ways:
• Switch Dr/Cr: Journal entry is reversed by switching the debit and credit amounts.
• Change Sign: Journal entry is reversed by changing the original journal amounts from
positive to negative.
A journal entry can be reversed only once. You can reverse a reversing journal entry.
You control which responsibility can reverse journal entries directly from the Enter Journals or
Enter Encumbrance window by excluding the function called Enter Journals: Reverse from the
responsibility's menu.
Reversing Journal Batches
• You can reverse a single journal entry or an entire batch of journal entries. When you
reverse a batch, General Ledger creates a reversing batch with a reversing journal entry for
each journal entry in the original batch.

Chapter 4 - Page 43

EMAK
• General Ledger uses the reversal method assigned to the journal category in the Journal
Reversal Criteria window.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 44

EMAK
Creating Reversing Journals

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Reversing
a n s
Creating
M n-t r Journals
nohave two options for manually selecting journal entries for reversal. You can create the
You
reversal immediately or enter the period and generate the reversal later.
Use the More Actions window to immediately reverse any posted or unposted journal entry or
batch in the current period or future enterable period.
(N) Journals > Enter (B) Review Journal (B) More Actions
(N) Journals > Enter (B) Review Batch (B) More Actions
Use the More Details window to define a reversal period for a journal entry. Then, select the
journal entry at a later time, to be reversed in the Reverse Journals window.
(N) Journals > Enter (B) Review Journal (B) More Details
Use the Reverse Journals window to generate reversal journals with a predefined reversal
period, such as monthly accruals, that need to be reversed at the beginning of the following
period.
(N) Journals > Generate > Reversal
Note: If you select the Reversal button in the More Details Window, the reversing journal will
be created immediately.

Chapter 4 - Page 45

EMAK
Reversing Journals Automatically

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Journals
a n s
Reversing
M n-t r Automatically
noroutinely generate and post large numbers of reversing journal entries as part of your
If you
monthly procedures for closing and opening accounting periods, you can use the Automatic
Journal Reversal feature to save time and automate the process. This feature automatically
reverses your previous month's accrual journal entries and automatically post them, if desired.
• Enable AutoReverse, and optionally AutoPost Reversal, options for journal categories.
• Enter journals using categories with AutoReverse enabled.
• Launch the Automatic Reversal program by:
- Submitting a request from the Submit Request window to run the Automatic Reversal
program for all journals that meet the submission requirements, or
- Setting the profile option, GL: Launch AutoReverse After Open Period, to Yes. When
you open the next period, the AutoReverse program finds all journal entries that have
categories with AutoReverse and, optionally AutoPost, enabled. It creates reversing
journal entries and, optionally, posts them.

Chapter 4 - Page 46

EMAK
Journal Reversal Prerequisites

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 47

EMAK
Running Journal Entries Report

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 48

EMAK
Integrating with Oracle General Ledger

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rwitha n s
Integrating
M n-t Oracle General Ledger
nocreate your journal entries in a spreadsheet, using all of the Microsoft Excel features that
You
you are familiar with. When you are ready, upload your journal entries from Web ADI to the
GL_INTERFACE table. From the interface table, submit the Journal Import process to create
postable journal entries.
Journal import can be submitted in three ways:
• From Web ADI, at the same time you submit the upload process
• From Web ADI as a separate submission process
• From General Ledger using the Import Journals window.
When your journal entries have been validated by Oracle General Ledger, unposted journal
entries are created and can be reviewed in the Enter Journals window in General Ledger.

Chapter 4 - Page 49

EMAK
Web Applications Desktop Integrator Overview

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a
Web
la rans Desktop Integrator Overview
Applications
M n-t
noADI brings Oracle E-Business Suite functionality to the desktop where the familiar
Web
Microsoft Excel, Word, and Project applications can be used to complete your Oracle E-
Business Suite tasks.
The Web ADI integration with Microsoft Excel enables you to bring your E-Business Suite
data to a spreadsheet where familiar data entry and modeling techniques can be used to
complete Oracle E-Business Suite tasks. You can create formatted spreadsheets on your
desktop that allow you to download, view, edit, and create Oracle E-Business Suite data. Use
data entry shortcuts (such as copying and pasting or dragging and dropping ranges of cells) or
Excel formulas to calculate amounts to save time. You can combine speed and accuracy by
invoking lists of values for fields within the spreadsheet. After editing the spreadsheet, you can
use Web ADIs validation functionality to validate the data before uploading it to the Oracle E-
Business Suite. Validation messages are returned to the spreadsheet, allowing you to identify
and correct invalid data.
All business rules these users encounter in the main application are enforced within the Web
ADI worksheet. For example, if the wrong cost center is entered for a journal, the data will not
be committed to the database; a message will be returned directly to the worksheet where the

Chapter 4 - Page 50

EMAK
invalid data exists; the user can then quickly make the correction and save their Excel data to
Oracle General Ledger.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 51

EMAK
Web ADI Core Functionality

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Corea n s
Web ADI
M n-t r Functionality
no Features
Layout
• Remove and add fields to a Layout: Users are only presented with the fields they need,
resulting in simpler UI and shorter navigation paths between needed fields increases
productivity.
• Indicate field placement in the Layout: The UI can conform to your business process. If
entering data in a certain order will quicken entry, then fields in the UI can be ordered in a
similar way.
• Assign a default value to a field in a Layout: Save time by having default values
automatically populate the document when it is generated.
• Save the layout: Layouts can be defined by one with the appropriate responsibility, then
used by the entire site.
Text Import Features
• Import text file data into a document on the desktop (i.e. Excel worksheets): Move data
from legacy or third party systems into Oracle Applications. The data will be accurate
since it will move through the desktop document allowing for edits, then validated before

Chapter 4 - Page 52

EMAK
it is uploaded. Data conversion from other systems is simplified by eliminating the need
for custom SQL scripts.
• Create Mapping Templates which can be modified and re-used: Change where data is
moved on the fly. Accommodate organizational changes and data restructuring by the easy
creation or modification of mapping templates.
Security Features
• Attach Web ADI functions to a menu: Create customized points of access which act as
security profiles.
• Attach a menu to a responsibility that is assigned to users: Restrict Web ADI access on the
user level.
• Add default parameters to a self service link: Force users to use predefined parameters
when generating a document on their desktop.
• Attach form function to a user's menu to grant access to an integrator: Determine the
desktop functionality within Web ADI to which a user has access.
s a
Internet Computing Features
h
) ฺa
m
• Centrally Deployed: The client needs only a browser and Excel to operate the product.
o
o o ฺc uide
• Runs on the Web: The client/server ADI installs everything to the PC, including all of the
y ah ent G
business rules. The move to a web architecture means that the business rules are now
0 0 0@ Stud
installed on the middle tier. So when Web ADI communicates with the database, only data
is sent.
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 53

EMAK
Desktop Integration Via Web ADI

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Integration
Desktop
M n-t r Via Web ADI
o E-Business Suite task you perform on the desktop is determined by the integrator
ThenOracle
you select in Web ADI. Each integrator is delivered with the E-Business Suite product that
provides the functionality being integrated with the desktop.
General Ledger - Journals Integrator Features
• Automatically builds spreadsheet-based journal entry worksheets based on a definable
layout.
• Enables quick journal entry by copying and pasting journal lines, then making incremental
modifications.
• Allows you to define journal templates which you can modify and upload repeatedly.
• Full validation of accounts with enforcement of security and cross validation rules, as well
as other reference fields.
• Loads journals into Oracle General Ledger through the General Ledger open interface.
• Conforms to Oracle General Ledger Euro compliance rules.
• Provides lists of values for fields (including KFFs and DFFs) within the spreadsheet.

Chapter 4 - Page 54

EMAK
General Ledger - Budgets Integrator Features

• Automatically builds budget worksheets, based on the budget elements you define in
• Creates budget worksheets for any open budget period range.
• Provides a flexfield pop-up window to assist entering and validating new budget accounts.
• Enforces segment value security in budget worksheets.

• Limits the accounts that are downloaded.
• Creates graphs of your budgets and actuals using a variety of graphing styles, including
bar graphs, line graphs, and even 3-D area graphs.
• Provides budget notes to add descriptions to accounts and amounts in your budget.
• Create Assets Integrator and Physical Inventory Integrator Features
• Use the Layout feature to define personalized asset worksheets.
• Allows spreadsheet cut, copy, and paste functionality.
s a
h
) ฺa
• Provides Lists of Values for easy access to valid field information.
m
• Maps data files into asset worksheets when used in conjunction with the Import Text File
o
feature.
o o ฺc uide
ah ent G
• Full validation of accounts with enforcement of security and cross validation rules, as well
y
as other reference fields.
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
• Posts assets to Oracle Assets through the Mass Additions table.
HRMS Integrators Features
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
• Oracle HRMS delivers a number of Integrators that support download of data from
a ns
various windows and folders.
( m c e
r g es le li
• Another delivered Integrator provides both download and upload support for salary
Ge ferab
proposals and administration.
k
la rans
• In addition, a system administrator can configure Web ADI for HRMS to download data
a
M n-t
from any other HRMS window or directly from the application database, by setting up
no new Integrators as required.

Chapter 4 - Page 55

EMAK
Administering Web ADI

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ranWeb s
Administering
M n-t ADI
no Administrators can also edit mappings and layouts for all integrators.
System
Implementation Methods
• Generally, the product implementation follows one of two methods:
- The product integrates the generate spreadsheet functionality within its own
functional page flow. Web ADI is used in the background to generate the spreadsheet.
This is the most common method.
- The product provides a self-service menu item that invokes the Web ADI Create
Document page flow.

Chapter 4 - Page 56

EMAK
Creating Web ADI Spreadsheets

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 57

EMAK
Working With Web ADI Spreadsheets

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la With
a n s
Working
M n-t r Web ADI Spreadsheets
no Data
Viewing
• The toggle bars at the top of the spreadsheet allow you to toggle on and off the views of
each of the sections: Context, Header, and Lines. Web ADI enables you to turn on
Microsoft Excel filtering on the line items. This is useful when your spreadsheet contains
many rows of data.
Multiple Worksheets
• Your spreadsheet may contain multiple worksheets if your product integrator is defined to
generate multiple worksheets or if your downloaded data exceeds 64,000 rows, multiple
worksheets will be automatically created. If your spreadsheet contains multiple
worksheets, then at upload time you will be presented the options of Upload or Upload
All. Upload will upload only the current worksheet. Upload All will upload all
worksheets.
Viewing Graphs
• If your integrator supports graphs, your spreadsheet will include additional graphing
options.

Chapter 4 - Page 58

EMAK
Defining Web ADI Layouts

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Web a n s
Defining
M n-t r ADI Layouts
no enable you to customize the user interface presented in your spreadsheet. Use the
Layouts
layout functionality to determine the fields in a spreadsheet, set their positions, and specify
default values for the fields.
A layout must be available before you create a spreadsheet in the Create Document flow. Some
integrators offer predefined layouts, or you can use the procedure described in this chapter to
create a layout.
Note: For some products, the layouts are predefined and preselected. Therefore you cannot
select an alternate layout during document creation.
Note: Unless your User is assigned the System Administrator responsibility, you must be
granted access to an integrator to modify its layout. Specific form functions grant access to
specific integrators.

Chapter 4 - Page 59

EMAK
Defining Web ADI Mappings

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Web a n s
Defining
M n-t r ADI Mappings
Younocan choose to automatically import data into the spreadsheet during the Create Document
flow. When you choose to import data on the Content page, Web ADI prompts you to select a
mapping. Web ADI requires a mapping to determine where imported data should be placed in
the spreadsheet.
Mapping associates columns in the imported data with columns in the spreadsheet. You do not
need to create new mappings for fields that do not have data, or if a mapped field is not
included in the spreadsheet. You need to create multiple mappings for Content only if the
associations between the downloaded columns and the fields in the spreadsheet change. If you
import text files with varied data structures, you may have to define more than one mapping for
each text file variation.
Note: Do not modify Contents that download data from the Oracle E-Business Suite.
Note: To modify an integrator's mappings, you must be granted access to the integrator or have
the System Administrator responsibility.

Chapter 4 - Page 60

EMAK
Defining Web ADI Style Sheets

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Web a n s
Defining
M n-t r ADI Style Sheets
o Sheet enables you to define the following properties for the Sheet, the Prompts, the
ThenStyle
Hints, and the Data fields:
• Background color
• Font color
• Font Family
• Font Style
• Font size
Navigate to the Create Style Sheet page using the Define Style Sheet link. This may be under
the Desktop Integration responsibility, or it may be located under a different responsibility
assigned to you by your system administrator.
Select a Read Only color to apply to the background of read-only fields. Read-only fields take
the font properties of Data fields. Use the color picker to select a color, or for additional color
options, you can enter the hexadecimal value for the color in the field provided (for example,
enter #A52A2A for brown).

Chapter 4 - Page 61

EMAK
Defining Web ADI Setup Options for Key Flexfields

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Web a n s
Defining
M n-t r ADI Setup Options for Key Flexfields
WebnoADI provides the option to set right-justification and zero padding for every segment of a
key flexfield, regardless of this setting at the value set level.
Lists of values for flexfields apply character format masks after a segment value has been
selected. These format masks such as right-justify and zero padding and maximum character
width are derived from the flexfield value set definition. Use the Web ADI Setup Options
feature to override the values specified in the value set definition.
Note: If you are migrating from client server ADI, this provides the equivalent functionality to
the Zero Pad Account Values feature.

Chapter 4 - Page 62

EMAK
Uploading and Downloading Data from Web ADI Spreadsheets

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Document
a n s
Manage
M n-t r Links
no Data
Uploading
After creating and modifying your spreadsheet, you can upload the data to Oracle Applications.
To upload data:
1. While viewing your spreadsheet, choose Upload from the Oracle menu. The Upload
Parameters window appears.
2. Select the desired parameters. Upload parameters depend on the integrator you select.
Moreover, your system administrator might disallow you from changing upload
parameters using the Web ADI: Allow Set Parameters profile option.
3. Start the upload process. After the upload process completes, the upload window indicates
whether or not the upload was successful. Web ADI returns messages to the spreadsheet
identifying all rows containing invalid values. If the data in any rows are invalid, Web
ADI does not upload any of the data in the spreadsheet. You must correct all errors to
successfully upload the spreadsheet. Any errors that occur during the upload of a multi-
sheet workbook will also be displayed in a Summary Worksheet. The Summary
Worksheet enables you to see all errors and link to them.
Note: Not all spreadsheets support upload.

Chapter 4 - Page 63

EMAK
Downloading Data
Download enables you to refresh data that you have imported into your spreadsheet. This
option is available only if the spreadsheet contains imported data.
Note: Any new rows of data or other modifications that you have made on the spreadsheet will
be overwritten when you use Download to refresh the data. Some product integrators may not
allow refresh.
If you imported data from a text file, Download will not be available.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 64

EMAK
Identifying Web ADI Profile Options

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rWeb
a n s
Identifying
M n-t ADI Profile Options
noprofile options can be set to control specific Web ADI functions in your system.
These

Chapter 4 - Page 65

EMAK
Identifying Form Functions, Menus, and Responsibilities in Web

ADI
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no Form Functions, Menus, and Responsibilities in Web ADI
Identifying
Form Functions
This is a list of form functions that are automatically created. Note that integrators are not
installed with Web ADI, but with their associated products.
Menus
The Desktop Integration Menu is created with the following prompts:
• Create Document (BNE_ADI_ CREATE_DOCUMENT)
• Define Layout (BNE_ADI_DEFINE_LAYOUT)
• Define Mapping (BNE_ADI_DEFINE_MAPPING)
• Manage Document Links (BNE_ADI_LOB_MANAGEMENT)
• Setup Options (BNE_ADI_SETUP_OPTIONS)
Define Style Sheet (BNE_ADI_DEFINE_STYLESHEET)
Responsibility
• The Desktop Integration responsibility is created with the Desktop Integration Menu.

Chapter 4 - Page 66

EMAK
Overview of Importing Journal Entries

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la ofraImporting
Overview
M n-t Journal Entries
noJournal Import
About
• Use Journal Import to integrate information from other applications such as payroll,
accounts receivable, accounts payable and fixed assets with your General Ledger
application. For each accounting period, you can import accounting data from these feeder
systems, then review, update and post the journal entries. You can also use Journal Import
to import historical data from your previous accounting system. General Ledger lets you
import data from multiple interface tables. This enables you to customize interface tables
to your specific requirements. Each particular source/group ID combination will only have
data in one interface table at a time. Journal import will process data from one table at a
time.
• To import subledger and feeder system data to General Ledger:
- Set up General Ledger to accept Journal Import data by defining your ledger,
currencies, accounts, journal sources, and categories. You should also run the
Optimizer program, and define your concurrent program controls.
- Export data from your feeder system and populate the GL_INTERFACE table. Note:
If you use reporting currencies and Oracle subledger systems, you must post to

Chapter 4 - Page 67

EMAK
General Ledger from each subledger multiple times. Post first using your primary
subledger responsibility, which transfers amounts denominated in your functional
currency. Post next using each of your subledger reporting responsibilities, which
transfers amounts denominated in your reporting currencies.
- Run Journal Import. If your import program converts your journal entries from other
sources into the required data format, and all of the data is valid in your General
Ledger application, then Journal Import should run successfully the first time.
However, if you load data into the GL_INTERFACE table which is not valid in your
General Ledger application, Journal Import informs you of the specific errors on the
Journal Import Execution Report. Note: If you use reporting currencies and Oracle
subledger systems, and have chosen not to run Journal Import automatically when
posting amounts to General Ledger from your subledgers, you must run Journal
Import manually in your primary ledger and in each of your reporting ledgers.
- Use the Journal Import Execution Report to review the status of all import journal
a
entries. The Journal Import Execution Report prints a line for each journal entry
s
h
) ฺa
source from which you are importing journal entries.
- m
If you encounter relatively few Journal Import errors, you can correct the data in the
o
GL_INTERFACE table.
o o ฺc uide
- ah ent G
If you encounter several Journal Import errors, you should delete the Journal Import
y
0 0 0@ Stud
data from the GL_INTERFACE table, and correct the information in your feeder
system before rerunning Journal Import.
e s 2 this
-
rg use
Review the journal entries created by Journal Import before you post them.
g e
-
k_ e to
Post your Journal Import journal entries.
l a
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 68

EMAK
Importing Descriptive Flexfields

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Descriptive
Importing
M n-t r Flexfields
no descriptive flexfields is optional.
Importing
You can choose to import descriptive flexfields with or without validation. If importing with
validation, Journal Import creates journal lines only if validation succeeds.
If you want to import descriptive flexfield information from Oracle subledgers, you must run
Journal Import separately in Oracle General Ledger using the Import Journals window. Choose
to import descriptive flexfields with or without validation.
Note: You should always import descriptive flexfield information with validation to avoid
corrupting journal lines.
If you want to create summary journal lines, you cannot import descriptive flexfields.

Chapter 4 - Page 69

EMAK
Importing Journals
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Journals
a n s
Importing
M n-t r
o > Import > Run
(N)nJournals
To run journal import from General Ledger, navigate to the Import Journals window. Enter the
source. You can choose No Group ID, All Group IDs, or specific Group IDs. You can use the
list of values for this field to determine if the Group ID exists in the interface table. Then select
the Import button to start the import program.
Note: Oracle subledgers create a report when the transfer is run from the subledger that
displays the Journal Import Group ID. You can view the output in the Request window to
locate the Group ID.
You can run Journal Import in parallel for several sources as long as each request corresponds
to a unique Source/Group ID combination. The maximum number of combinations you can run
at one time is 20.
Oracle General Ledger names the created batch with the following naming convention:
<Optional User-Entered Reference><Source><Request ID><Actual Flag><Group ID>
Suspense Posting

Chapter 4 - Page 70

EMAK
• If suspense posting is enabled for your ledger, select the Post Errors to Suspense check
box. Journal Import posts entries with invalid account combinations to a predefined
suspense account or accounts, if you have defined one for each journal source and
category. Typical account errors are:
- Detailed posting not allowed.
- Account disabled for this date.

- Disabled account.
- Account code combination is not valid.
- Account code combination ID does not exist.
• If you choose not to post errors to a suspense account, Journal Import rejects any
source/group ID combination with account errors.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 71

EMAK
Multi-Table Journal Import

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rJournal
Multi-Table
M n-t Import
noMulti–Table Journal Import
Using
• General Ledger provides you with the Journal Import Package
(GL_JOURNAL_IMPORT_PKG) to create a new interface table and populate the
GL_INTERFACE_CONTROL table. In addition, you can create your own procedures to
populate your interface table with data and to launch Journal Import. This enables you to
automate the entire procedure.
• Below are the steps to follow to use Multi-Table Journal Import:
- Create a new interface table. New interface tables must have the same columns as the
GL_INTERFACE table but you can add more if your needs require.
- Populate the new interface table with data.
- Populate the GL_INTERFACE_CONTROL table with one record for each
source/group ID combination that was put into the interface table. Specify a table
name that the data is to be retrieved from for each combination. Specify what should
be done with the data once it has been processed.

Chapter 4 - Page 72

EMAK
- Start Journal Import using the Import Journals window. Specify each of the
source/group ID combinations that you want to import. If there are multiple tables,
Journal Import will be launched multiple times.
- If Journal Import indicates that the data is erroneous, then correct the data using the
Correct Journal Import Data window or delete it using the Delete Journal Import Data
window. If you choose to correct it, then start Journal Import again using the Import
Journals window.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 73

EMAK
Journal Import Group By Effective Dates Description

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Import
a n s
Journal
M n-t r Group By Effective Dates Description
no Import now provides an option to automatically group journal lines into journal entries
Journal
based on effective dates. This functionality was previously only available to customers using
average balance processing.
Through a new profile option called GL Journal Import: Separate Journals by Accounting
Date, you can choose to separate journal lines into separate journals by different accounting
dates, even if using a standard ledger. This includes journals originating from Oracle subledger
applications.

Chapter 4 - Page 74

EMAK
Journal Import Group By Effective Dates Benefits

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Import
a n s
Journal
M n-t r Group By Effective Dates Benefits
Byn o
grouping and monitoring business transactions by date, rather than by accounting period:
• You have greater flexibility in how you want to account for your business transactions.
You can account for them by effective date or by accounting period.
• You facilitate financial auditing and compliance with the new Sarbanes-Oxley Act.
• For DBI customers, you have better information that is updated on a daily basis. This
enables you to make better business decisions and react more quickly to opportunities.

Chapter 4 - Page 75

EMAK
How to Set Up Journal Import Group By Effective Dates

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laSet rUp
a n s
How to
M n-t Journal Import Group By Effective Dates
o the profile option called GL Journal Import: Separate Journals by Accounting Date.
1.nSet
- If set to Yes, journals that pass the GL_INTERFACE table via Journal Import will be
separated into separate journals by accounting date.
- If set to No, journals will be grouped by accounting period.
2. Run the Journal Import process.
Note: If you want journals that originated from Oracle subledgers to be separated by
accounting date, you must set this profile option for each Oracle subledger application.

Chapter 4 - Page 76

EMAK
Using Journal Import Group By Effective Dates

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laJournal
a n s
Using
M n-t r Import Group By Effective Dates
nohave two journal lines in the same accounting period but with different effective dates,
If you
by setting the profile option to Yes, you can create two separate journals; one for each line that
has a different effective date. Both journals will still be grouped in the same journal batch.
By setting the profile option to No, the lines will be grouped by accounting period and placed
in the same journal. This is the current functionality for standard ledgers.

Chapter 4 - Page 77

EMAK
Importing Journal References

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Journal
a n s
Importing
M n-t r References
nocan import subledger transactions into General Ledger in detail. The Journal Import
You
process creates one journal entry line for every transaction line in the subledger.
To reduce the size of journal lines and speed the import process, you can choose to summarize
journal entry information when you run Journal Import:
• Select Create Summary Journals check box to have Journal Import summarize all
transactions for the same account, period, and currency into one debit and credit line.
• When Journal Import creates summary journal lines, all mapping back to the source
information is lost. However, you can preserve transaction detail for summary journal
lines in the GL_IMPORT_REFERENCES table:
- Select the Import Journal References check box in the Journal Sources window for
each journal entry source you wish to preserve. (N) Setup > Journal > Sources.
- Oracle General Ledger populates the GL_IMPORT_REFERENCE table with one
record for every transaction in your feeder system.
You cannot import descriptive flexfields if you create summary journals.

Chapter 4 - Page 78

EMAK
Note: If you want to be able to drill down to subledger transaction lines, such as Payables
invoices, from General Ledger, select the Import Journal References check box for the
subledger source in the Journal Sources window whether you transfer in summary or detail
from subledgers.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 79

EMAK
Reviewing Journal Import Data

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Journal
a n s
Reviewing
M n-t r Import Data
no the status of accounting data imported into Oracle General Ledger using the Journal
Review
Import Execution Report. Use the Error Key section on the report to identify the types of errors
found.
The journal import program rejects all transactions of a Source and Group ID if any of its
journals have errors.
Use the journal import verification process to identify and correct journal import errors.

Chapter 4 - Page 80

EMAK
Journal Import Verification Process

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Importa n s
Journal
M n-t r Verification Process
no When Using Open Interfaces
Validation
• Journal Import validates all of your data before it creates journal entries in General
Ledger. If you allow suspense posting for your ledger, Journal Import assigns lines with
invalid accounts to the suspense account. Journal Import rejects all other invalid lines, and
they remain in the GL_INTERFACE table, where you can correct them online in the
Correct Journal Import Data window or in your feeder systems. Journal Import also prints
your error lines in the Journal Import Execution report.
Journal Level Validation
• Journal Import validates the following attributes to ensure that your journals contain the
appropriate accounting data:
- Account combinations
- Unbalanced journal entries
- Periods
- Foreign currency errors
- Budget information

Chapter 4 - Page 81

EMAK
- Encumbrance information
- Other miscellaneous items
Correcting Journal Import Errors Online
• If your Journal Import results in relatively few errors, you can make online corrections to
the data that was rejected, then rerun Journal Import to import the corrected data.
(N) Journals > Import > Correct

• The Correct Journals Import window displays each field of the GL_INTERFACE table.
From this window you can query import lines that have a status of Error or Corrected.
• Make your corrections.
- If you are correcting Accounts data, you must enter an account segment value or enter
a valid Code Combination ID.
- Segment values override Code Combination IDs, so you must first clear all displayed
segment values before changing the displayed Code Combination ID.
s
• The Status changes to Corrected after you save your changes. a
h
) ฺa
• Select the Import Journals button to return to the Import Journals window.
o m
• Deleting Journal Import Data to Correct Errors
o o ฺc uide
ah ent G
• If you encountered a high number of errors from the Journal Import process, you should
y
errors. 0 0 0@ Stud
delete all information from the interface table and rerun Journal Import after correcting the
(N) Journals > Import > Delete e s 2 this

g e rg use
• If you delete import data that originated from an Oracle subledger, you must correct the
l a k_ e to
data in the subledger and reimport it from the original source:
( m a ns
c e
- Delete all the import data for your journal entry source and group ID from the
r g es le li
GL_INTERFACE table.
k Ge ferab
- Correct the errors in feeder system.
a la rans
- Repopulate the GL_Interface table.
M n-t
no - Rerun Journal Import.
Caution: Do not delete journal import data from Oracle subledgers such as Oracle Payables or
Oracle Receivables. The Oracle subledgers set flags to indicate the transactions have been sent
to Oracle General Ledger. These flags must be reset before the transactions can be resent.

Chapter 4 - Page 82

EMAK
Using Journal Entry Sources and Categories

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laJournal
a n s
Using
M n-t r Entry Sources and Categories
o > Journal > Sources
(N)nSetup
Journal entry sources indicate where your journal entries originate.
General Ledger supplies a list of predefined journal sources for journal entries that originate in
Oracle subledger applications, such as Assets or Payables.
You can define your own journal sources for non-Oracle feeder systems.
For each journal source, specify whether to import detail reference information for summary
journals imported from your Oracle subledger applications. This is required if you want to be
able to drilldown to the original subledger transaction from balances in General Ledger.
With journal sources, you can:
• Define intercompany and suspense accounts for specific sources.
• Run the AutoPost program for specific sources.
• Import journals by source.
• Freeze journals imported from subledgers to prevent users from making changes to any
journals that have been transferred to General Ledger from that source. This ensures that
transactions from your subledger systems reconcile with those posted in General Ledger.

Chapter 4 - Page 83

EMAK
• Report on journals by source using the Foreign Currency Journals or General Journals
reports.
If you have journal approval enabled for your ledger, you can use journal sources to enforce
management approval of journals before they are posted.
If you are using average balance processing, select an effective date for your journal source.
For more information, refer to the Oracle General Ledger User Guide or 11i General Ledger
Financial Management Advanced Topic Average Balance Processing.
Journal Categories
(N) Setup > Journal > Categories
• Journal categories help you differentiate journal entries by purpose or type, such as
accrual, payments, or receipts. When you create journal entries, you must choose the
default or specify a category.
• Using categories, you can:
- Define intercompany and suspense accounts for specific categories.
s a
h a
- Use document sequences to sequentially number journals by category.
) ฺ
o m
ฺc uide
- Define journal categories for accruals and estimates. Use these categories when you
o o
define criteria for AutoReverse and AutoPost.
y ah ent G
• Journal categories appear in standard reports, such as the General Journals report. You can
0 0 0@ Stud
run reports by category, by source, or category and source. For example, for month end
e s 2 this
close, you might run a report listing all journals that were created for the period with a
g e rg use
category of accruals. This way you can review the accrual entries created before finalizing
your close.
l a k_ e to
a ns
Caution: Oracle General Ledger does not have a standard report showing Journal Import
( m c e
es le li
reference information. You must create a custom report to access this information.
r g
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 84

EMAK
Setting Profile Options

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laProfile
a n s
Setting
M n-t r Options
no Allow Multiple Exchange Rates - Controls whether to allow multiple conversion
Journals:
rates within a journal entry.
Journals: Allow Posting During Journal Entry - Controls whether you can post a manual
journal entry from the Enter Journals window.
Journals: Default Category - Specify the default category for manual journal entries.
Journals: Enable Prior Period Notification - Controls whether General Ledger notifies you
when you are entering a journal for a prior period.
Journals: Mix Statistical and Monetary - Controls whether you can enter statistical amounts in
the same journal line as monetary amounts.
Journals: Override Reversal Method - Controls whether you can override the specified default
reversal method.

Chapter 4 - Page 85

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 86

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 87

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 4 - Page 88

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
G
ah entEntries
AdvancedyJournal
0
Chapter07
0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Advanced Journal Entries

Chapter 7 - Page 1

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 2

EMAK

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 3

EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 4

EMAK
About Recurring Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 5

EMAK
Recurring Journal Types

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Journal
a n s
Recurring
M n-t r Types
no Journals
Skeleton
• Skeleton journals have varying amounts in each accounting period. You define a recurring
journal entry without amounts, then enter the appropriate amounts each accounting period.
• There are no formulas to enter, only account combinations. For example, you can record
temporary labor expense in the same account combination every month with varying
amounts due to fluctuations in hours.
Standard Journals
• Standard journals use fixed account combinations and amounts each accounting period.
• You enter a journal using constants. For example, record monthly auto lease expenses
with constant amounts charged to the same account.
Formula Journals
• A formula entry is a recurring entry that uses formulas instead of amounts to calculate
amounts.
• For example, calculate rent expense based on end-of-month headcounts.

Chapter 7 - Page 6

EMAK
Creating Recurring Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Recurring
a n s
Creating
M n-t r Journals
o
(N)nJournals—>Define—>Recurring
There is a basic four-step process to create recurring journals.
1. Create recurring journal definition.
- Define reusable skeleton templates, standard templates, and formulas.
2. Generate journals.
- Use skeleton templates, standard templates, and formulas to create unposted journal
entries.
- Reuse the templates to generate journal entries in multiple accounting periods.
3. Review the journal for accuracy.
4. Post the journal entry.
Note: You can copy entries from an existing recurring journal batch by selecting AutoCopy
Batch.
• Consider grouping your recurring entries into one batch (by frequency of generation) to
speed processing.

Chapter 7 - Page 7

EMAK
• Journal Entry Region. Optionally, you can enter a range of Active Dates to limit the use of
the recurring entry to a specific time interval.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 8

EMAK
Recurring Journal Entry Lines

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Journal
a n s
Recurring
M n-t r Entry Lines
o
(N)nJournals—>Define—>Recurring (B) Lines
How to Enter a Recurring Journal Line
1. Enter a Line number in the Line field.
2. Enter the Account you want Oracle General Ledger to update when you generate and post
your recurring journals.
3. Enter an optional Line Description for the recurring entry line.
4. Enter a Formula for the line if this is a formula recurring entry. Otherwise, enter a
standard amount for standard entries.
Note: Formulas are not entered for skeleton journal entries.
5. If you are not entering a formula, enter all remaining lines for your recurring journal entry.
6. Save your work.

Chapter 7 - Page 9

EMAK
Automatic Offset Example

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Offset
a n s
Automatic
M n-t r Example
noto Enter an Automatic Offsetting Line
How
1. After you enter one or more lines for the recurring journal entry, enter 9999 as the line
number for the automatic offsetting line.
2. Enter an account combination for the line, but do not enter a formula. Oracle General
Ledger will automatically calculate the amount for this journal entry line when you
generate your recurring journal. The difference between the total debits and total credits
for the recurring journal entry will be calculated for you.
3. Save your work.

Chapter 7 - Page 10

EMAK
Formula Recurring Journals

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Recurring
Formula
M n-t r Journals
nocreating Formula Recurring Journals, create a formula for each journal line. Each
When
formula can contain an unlimited number of steps. The steps can use any combination of
amounts, account balances, and/or operators. The operators that can be used are:
• Enter: To enter the amount or balance from the account listed in the appropriate account.
• Add: To add the amount or account balance in the previous line to this line.
• Subtract: To subtract the amount or account balance in the previous line from this line.
• Multiply: To multiply the last amount or account balance by the number entered on this
line.
• Divide: To divide the last amount or account balance by the number entered on this line.
Note: If the formula yields a positive amount, your account will be debited. If your formula
yields a negative amount, your account will be credited.

Chapter 7 - Page 11

EMAK
Generating Recurring Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 12

EMAK
MassAllocations Overview
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 13

EMAK
MassAllocations versus Recurring Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 14

EMAK
Steps to Create MassAllocation Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a lato Create
a n s
Steps r
M n-t MassAllocation Journals
no Process
Five-Step
1. Create MassAllocation Definition
- Enter batch information
- Create MassAllocation formulas
- Enter MassAllocation formulas
2. Validate Definition
3. Generate MassAllocation Journals
- Choose which batch to generate
4. Review Entries
- Review the journal for accuracy
5. Post the Journal Entry

Chapter 7 - Page 15

EMAK
Defining MassAllocation Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la MassAllocation
Defining
M n-t r Journals
o > Define > Allocation
(N)nJournals
To create MassAllocation Journal, use the following basic steps:
1. Open the Define MassAllocations window.
2. Enter a Name and Description (optional) for the MassAllocation batch.
3. Choose Actual or Encumbrance from the Balance Type poplist.
4. Select Formulas to enter MassAllocation formulas, then save your work.
5. Select Validate All to validate this batch and other unvalidated batches.
Note: Formulas cannot be generated until they have been validated successfully. Oracle
General Ledger verifies that allocation formulas conform to MassAllocation definition rules. If
Oracle General Ledger finds an invalid allocation, it marks the entire batch with an error status.
Validation does not guarantee that an journal entry will be created from the journal definition.
There must be balances in the accounts used in the MassAllocation journal.
6. Check the MassAllocation batch validation status:
- Validated: The definition is valid and follows the definition rules.

Chapter 7 - Page 16

EMAK
- Not Validated: The definition had not bee validated yet. Select the Validate ALL
button.
- In Process: Oracle General Ledger is still validating the formula.
- Error: The formula is not correct. Make corrections and select for validation again.
7. Generate unposted journal batches from your MassAllocation formulas.
Note: You can identify errors using the MassAllocations/MassBudgeting Validation Report.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 17

EMAK
Defining MassAllocation Formulas

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la MassAllocation
Defining
M n-t r Formulas
o > Define > Allocation (B) Formulas
(N)nJournals
How to Enter a MassAllocation Formula
1. Open the Define MassAllocations window and enter or query the name of the
MassAllocation batch to which you want to add the formula.
2. Select Formulas.
3. Enter the Name, Category, and Description (optional) of the MassAllocation formula.
Categories help you group journal entries in a convenient manner for reporting and
analysis.
4. Select whether to Allocate Balances from the full balance or from a single entered
currency. If you are allocating encumbrance balances, you must allocate the full balance.
You cannot allocate foreign currency encumbrances.
5. Select Full Cost Pool Allocation to have rounding differences added to the cost pool with
the largest relative balance. If you do not choose this option, any rounding differences will
remain in the original account.
6. Enter the formula lines using the formula A*B/C.

Chapter 7 - Page 18

EMAK
- A is the Cost Pool that will be allocated. The can be amount or an account balance.
- B is the numerator of the factor (a number or statistical account) that multiples the
cost pool for the allocation.
- C is the denominator of the factor (a number or statistical account) that multiples the
cost pool for the allocation.
Note: Parent values can be used in one or more segments. To improve performance keep the
number of parents to a minimum.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 19

EMAK
Account Segment Types

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Segment
a n s
Account
M n-t r Types
no (L)
Looping
• Assign this type to a parent segment value to include each child value assigned to the
parent value in the formula.
• The allocation program runs the formula once for each corresponding child segment value.
• You can loop only on parent values.
Summing (S)
• Assign this type to a parent segment value to sum the account balances of all the child
segment values assigned to a parent.
• You can sum only on parent values.
Constant (C)
• Assign this type to a child segment value to use the detail account balance associated with
the child value.

Chapter 7 - Page 20

EMAK
Target and Offset Accounts

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laand rOffset
Target
M n-t Accounts
noare the lines that are the actual journal entry.
These
Target (T)
• Enter an account in the Target line to specify the destination for your allocations.
• The parent value used in the target must be the same parent value used in the B and C
lines of the formula.
Offset (O)
• Enter an account in the Offset line to specify the account to use for the offsetting debit or
credit from your allocation.
• The Offset account is usually the same account as formula line A to reduce the cost pool
by the allocated amount.

Chapter 7 - Page 21

EMAK
MassAllocation Journal Example

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 22

EMAK
MassAllocation Journal Example

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 23

EMAK
Rent Expense Example

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ranExample
Rent Expense
M n-t
nocan automatically allocate rent expense.
You
Row Co Dept N. Acct
A 01 000 5740 Allocate cost pool to all departments
C C C
B 01 999 SQFT Loop through square footage of each department
C L C
C 01 999 SQFT Total the square footage
C S C
T 01 999 5740 Assign each department the result of A*B/C
C L C
O 01 000 5740 Use cost pool as offset account.
C C C
Note: In the last example, O must be different from A to add incremental allocations.

Chapter 7 - Page 24

EMAK
Validating MassAllocation Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la MassAllocation
Validating
M n-t r Journals
noare four validation statuses:
There
• Validated: The definition is valid and follows the definition rules.
• Not Validated: The definition had not bee validated yet. Select the Validate ALL button.
• In Process: Oracle General Ledger is still validating the formula.
• Error: The formula is not correct. Make corrections and select for validation again.

Chapter 7 - Page 25

EMAK
Generating Mass Allocation Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 26

EMAK
AutoAllocations Overview
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ransOverview
AutoAllocations
M n-t
o
•nAutoAllocations is a powerful feature to automate journal batch validation and generation
for:
- MassAllocations
- Recurring Journals
- MassBudgets
- MassEncumbrances
• Use AutoAllocations to process journal batches you generate regularly, such as month end
closing.

Chapter 7 - Page 27

EMAK
AutoAllocation Workbench
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ranWorkbench
AutoAllocation
M n-t
nocan use the AutoAllocation Workbench to automatically allocate any financial amount
You
throughout your organization.
You can create allocation sets with the AutoAllocation Workbench by grouping allocation
journals in an intuitive form. AutoAllocation supports any combination of MassAllocations,
MassBudgets, Recurring Journals, MassEncumbrances, and Oracle Projects allocation rules.
The AutoAllocation Workbench also supports both Step-Down and Parallel allocation sets.
Oracle General Ledger also provides the AutoAllocation Workbench to Oracle Projects users.
Project accountants can access the AutoAllocation Workbench directly from Oracle Projects to
create Step-down and Parallel allocation sets. You can even combine allocations in Oracle
Projects with Oracle General Ledger allocations. This tight integration allows for more
effective financial management, because you can leverage the most current financial data from
both applications as the basis for your allocations.
Oracle Workflow controls the approval and rollback processes.

Chapter 7 - Page 28

EMAK
Business Benefits of AutoAllocation Workbench

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Benefits
Business
M n-t r of AutoAllocation Workbench
o
•nAutomates step-down and parallel allocations
• Monitors allocation processes online
• Optional automated rollback eases error recovery and control
• Oracle Workflow notifies users of step-down allocation process results
• You can use Oracle Workflow to incorporate approvals into the step-down process

Chapter 7 - Page 29

EMAK
AutoAllocation Set Types

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 30

EMAK
Step-Down AutoAllocations
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rAutoAllocations
Step-Down
M n-t
o must create journal batches in a specific sequence when using Step-down
•nYou
AutoAllocation.
• Order your journal batches so that the process results of one step are used in the next step
of the AutoAllocation set.
• Step-down AutoAllocation sets automatically validate, generate, and post all journals
created by the process.
Note: You can navigate to all the required forms to define MassAllocation and Recurring
Journal formulas from the AutoAllocation workbench window.

Chapter 7 - Page 31

EMAK
Parallel AutoAllocations
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la AutoAllocations
Parallel
M n-t r
o
•nValidates and generates all the journal batches in the AutoAllocation set simultaneously.
• You can then post the generated journals to update your balances.

Chapter 7 - Page 32

EMAK
Additional Workbench Functionality

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 33

EMAK
AutoAllocation Sets and Oracle Workflow

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ranSetss
AutoAllocation
M n-t and Oracle Workflow
o Step-down AutoAllocation process invokes subprocesses to generate and validate
•nThe
AutoAllocation set batches incorporating approvals and notifications at various points in
the process.
• If the generation batch requires approvals, Workflow launches the batch approval process.
• If the Step-down AutoAllocation process fails, Workflow gives the contact individual or
responsibility the option to rollback the process. Rollback cancels any generated journal
batches and reverses any posted journal batches.
• To use the rollback option, you must set the GL: AutoAllocation Rollback Allowed profile
option.

Chapter 7 - Page 34

EMAK
AutoAllocations and Oracle Workflow

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ransand Oracle Workflow
AutoAllocations
M n-t
o Step-down AutoAllocation process invokes subprocesses to generate and validate
•nThe
AutoAllocation set batches incorporating approvals and notifications at various points in
the process. If the generation of a batch requires approvals, Workflow launches the batch
approval process.
• If the Step-down AutoAllocation process fails, Oracle Workflow gives the contact
individual or responsibility the option to roll back the process. Rollback cancels any
generated journal batches and reverses any posted journal batches.
Note: You must select the GL: AutoAllocation Rollback Allowed profile option for rollback to
be an option if the AutoAllocation process fails.
• The Workflow process is delivered with four customizable functions that allow customers
to have more control in the validation and generation of journals resulting from Step-down
allocations.

Chapter 7 - Page 35

EMAK
AutoAllocations Constraints
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 36

EMAK
Submitting AutoAllocation Set Requests

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rAutoAllocation
Submitting
M n-t Set Requests
no you submit your AutoAllocation set, complete the Parameters window, which must be
Before
accessed from the AutoAllocation Workbench window.
Submit Parallel and Step–Down AutoAllocation sets:
• Immediately
• Scheduled Later
• At Specified Intervals

Chapter 7 - Page 37

EMAK
Reviewing the Status of AutoAllocations

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 38

EMAK
Implementation Considerations for AutoAllocation Workbench

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 39

EMAK
AutoScheduling Overview
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ransOverview
AutoScheduling
M n-t
no Journal Scheduling enables you to generate Recurring Journals, AutoAllocation
Automatic
sets, Mass-Allocations, MassBudgets and Budget Formulas according to a schedule you define.
For example, you can schedule the same journal and allocation sets to be generated every
month as part of your month–end closing procedures.

Chapter 7 - Page 40

EMAK
AutoScheduling Process
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 41

EMAK
Financial Schedules
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Schedules
a n s
Financial
M n-t r
o > Other > Schedule
(N)nSetup
You can create General Ledger financial schedules based on different calendars and period
types. You can then schedule AutoAllocation sets, Recurring Journals, MassAllocations,
Budget Formulas, and MassBudgets to run according to the General Ledger schedules that you
have defined. Your journals (as well as any other process that can be submitted by SRS) are
automatically generated based on the schedule you assigned. All schedules are shared across
ledgers. You can define multiple schedules for each calendar and period type in Oracle General
Ledger.
How to Define a Financial Schedule
1. Open the Concurrent Request Schedules window.
2. In the Schedule field, enter your schedule name.
3. In the Calendar field, from the list of values select a calendar defined in Oracle General
Ledger.
4. In the Period Type field, choose a period type.

Chapter 7 - Page 42

EMAK
5. In the Run Day field, enter a number from 1 to 366, or enter last day to choose the last day
of each period. For example, selecting 5 for run day sets your request to run on the fifth
day of the period.
6. In the Run Time field, enter the time in 24-hour format. This is the time you want your
program to run on the day specified in the Run Day field.
7. Select the Enable check box to make your schedule available for selection from the
Standard Report Submission window.
8. Save your work.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 43

EMAK
Scheduling Journals
s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rJournals
Scheduling
M n-t
no or define Recurring journals, MassAllocations, Budget formulas, MassBudgets, and
Create
AutoAllocation sets. Enter submission parameters, and select a schedule to automate the
generation of your journals. You can then review and post the generated journals.
Note: You can also choose any defined schedule in the Application Object Library (AOL).
AOL schedules are based on a standard monthly calendar. You can define a new AOL
schedule or use one of your existing schedules. You can define your AOL schedule to run a
request as soon as possible, at a specific time, or repeatedly at specific intervals, on a specific
day and time of the week or month.

Chapter 7 - Page 44

EMAK
Scheduling a Request Using a Financial Schedule

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 45

EMAK
Periodic Submissions
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Submissions
Periodic
M n-t r
no Information on Incremental Submission
Additional
General Ledger calculates the journal period for subsequent scheduled submission based on the
initial period offset for Non-ADB ledgers. General Ledger assigns the date closest to the start
date as the journal effective date.
The initial period offset is the number of non-adjusting periods between the journal period and
the initial run period.
For example, if you want to establish a monthly schedule to book month end rent allocation
entries for calendar year 1999, schedule General Ledger to run a rent allocation set on the 1st
of every month from January to December 1999. Submit your rent allocation set on the start
date of February 1, 1999 and enter January 1999 as the Journal Period. The period offset is
calculated to be -1.
When the rent allocation set is automatically resubmitted on March 1, 1999, General Ledger
sets the Journal Period to February 1999. Each subsequent submission has a journal date of the
prior month.
Note: The AOL saved schedules do not save the increment parameter. It requires you to check
it every time.

Chapter 7 - Page 46

EMAK
Incremental Submissions
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la raSubmissions
Incremental
M n-t
nocan choose to increment your scheduled submissions.
You
Prerequisites for incremental submissions:
• Your ledger calendar must include all the schedule start dates for the schedule you are
using.
• You must enter a non–adjusting period when you first submit your scheduled request.
• You must enter a business day for both journal and calculation effective dates when you
submit a request in an Average Daily Balance, Non–Consolidation ledger.

Chapter 7 - Page 47

EMAK
Implementation Considerations for Journal Entry Automations

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 48

EMAK
GL Journal Approval Process Overview

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rApproval
GL Journal
M n-t Process Overview
o Journal Approval Process obtains the necessary management approvals for manual
ThenGL
journal batches. The process validates the journal batch, determines if approval is required,
submits the batch to approvers (if required), then notifies appropriate individuals of the
approval results.
The process gives one of four results:
• Approval Not Required—The journal batch does not need approval.
• Approved—The journal batch was approved by all necessary approvers.
• Rejected—The journal batch was rejected by an approver.
• Validation Failed—The journal batch failed the validation process and was never
submitted to the approver.
Note: If the profile option Journals: Allow Preparer Approval has been set to Yes and the
preparer has the appropriate authority, the journal can be autoapproved.

Chapter 7 - Page 49

EMAK
Journal Approval Features

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 50

EMAK
Journal Approval Process

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 51

EMAK

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 52

EMAK

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 53

EMAK

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 54

EMAK

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 55

EMAK
Approval Methods
s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Methods
a n s
Approval
M n-t r
o up the Management Chain—Requires approval of everyone within the management
1.nGo
chain, up to and including the person with appropriate authorization limit.
2. Go Direct to Person with Sufficient Authorization Limit–Requires only the approval of the
person with sufficient authorization limit. Bypasses any manager who does not have
sufficient authorization to approve the journal.
3. One Stop Go Direct—Requires approval of preparer’s direct manager and, if necessary,
the next person with sufficient approval authority.

Chapter 7 - Page 56

EMAK
Journal Approval Prerequisites

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Approval
a n s
Journal
M n-t r Prerequisites
o up Workflow.
1.nSet
2. Set General Ledger Profile Options:
- Journals—Allow Preparer Approval
- Journals—Find Approver Method
3. Configure GL Journal Approval Process in Oracle Workflow Builder.
4. Set three WorkFlow activity settings (Optional):
- Request Approval From Approver Timeout
- Reached Manager Notification Resend Limit
- Default Error Notification

Chapter 7 - Page 57

EMAK
Setting Up Journal Approval

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laup Journal
a n s
Setting
M n-t r Approval
o Journal Approval for your ledger.
1.nEnable
- Journal Approval is enabled in the ledger window
- When you enable journal approval for a ledger, you will be asked if you want to
automatically enable journal approval for manual journal entries
2. Specify journal sources that require Journal Approval.
- You can enable journal approval for specific journal sources in the Journal Sources
window
- For example, you might require journal approval for manual journal entries and a user
might require any MassAllocation journal batch to be approved before it is posted
3. Create an approval hierarchy for employees and supervisors and define authorization
limits.
- Enter employees in Oracle Human Resources (if installed) or Oracle General Ledger
- Define authorization limits for employees in the Journal Authorization Limits
window

Chapter 7 - Page 58

EMAK
- Oracle Workflow automatically routes journals to the appropriate user based on the
approval hierarchy you define
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 59

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no

Chapter 7 - Page 60

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
ah ent G
Financial Budgeting
y
0
Chapter09
0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 1

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 2

EMAK
Financial Budgeting
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 3

EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 4

EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 5

EMAK
What Is a Budget?
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a lIsa a Budget?
a n s
What
M n-t r
no help you manage your business by projecting revenues and expenses:
Budgets
• Estimate account balances for a specified range of periods
• Compare estimated amounts with actual balances and determine variances
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 6

EMAK
What Is an Oracle Budget?

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a lIsa an Oracle
a n s
What
M n-t r Budget?
o
Fornexample, if you allocate total benefit costs to cost centers based on headcount, you can
budget headcount and total benefit costs, and let Oracle General Ledger created detailed cost
center budgets for you.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 7

EMAK
Available Budget Methods

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Budget
a n s
Available
M n-t r Methods
no General Ledger provides a variety of tools to create, maintain, and track your budgets:
Oracle
• Upload budget amounts from an Excel spreadsheet.
• Create an unlimited number of budgets or forecasts.
• Control user access to budgets.
• Create budget organizations to mirror the levels of your company's organization and to
control user access to budget information.
• Structure your budget into an unlimited number of levels.
• Create master-detail budgets.
• The following applications can be used:
- Manual budgets created in the Oracle General Ledger Application
- Uploaded budgets created in the Application Desktop Integrator's Budget Wizard
- Uploaded budgets created in Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting
- Uploaded budgets from non Oracle systems or applications
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 8

EMAK
Anatomy of a Budget—Overview
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 9

EMAK
Budget Accounting Cycle

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laAccounting
Budget
M n-t r Cycle
no Budgets and Budget Organizations
Defining
• Define budget periods, up to a maximum of sixty.
• Define budget organizations at any level: cost center, division, sector, and so on. Control
access to budget data by assigning passwords to those organizations. Create subsequent
budget organizations quickly by copying existing budget organizations.
Entering Budgets
• Enter budget data using standard entry, formula-based entry, and automatic allocations.
• Enter budget amounts using annual spread, fixed amounts, and calculated methods.
• Enter budget amounts using either an individual account or a worksheet-type screen
layout.
• Transfer budget amounts from one account to another. You can transfer a fixed amount or
a percentage; you can transfer multiple periods at one time.
Reviewing and Correcting Budgets
• Review budget amounts by period and account combination. Check for budget variances
and violations.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 10

EMAK
• Perform online review of master/detail budgets. Compare summary balances between

master/detail budgets.
Freezing Budgets
• Freeze budgets to prevent further update to completed budgets.
Reporting on Budgets
• Run standard or customized budget reports.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 11

EMAK
Creating a Budget
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la a Budget
a n s
Creating
M n-t r
o Oracle General Ledger, you create a budget by designating Amounts to a combination
1.nIn
of an Account and a Period.
2. Use the Define Budget window to specify the accounting periods that you want to include
in your budget.
3. Use the Define Budget Organization window to specify accounts by defining a budget
organization, then assigning appropriate accounts to that organization.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 12

EMAK
Budget Definition Steps

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laDefinition
Budget
M n-t r Steps
o how to set up the budgets, e.g. top-down, bottom-up, middle-out.
1.nPlan
2. Other decisions include whether or not you need Budgetary control and encumbrances,
multiple versions of a budget, multiple currency budgeting.
3. Next, create budgets. Define master and detail budgets.
4. Create budget organizations that contain unique ranges of accounts for each unit that
requires a budget.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 13

EMAK
Budget Hierarchies
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laHierarchies
a n s
Budget
M n-t r
nocan use the following methods to structure budgets:
You
• Top-down budgeting: Enter budget amounts at the top level, then distribute to lower
levels.
• Bottom-up budgeting: Enter budget amounts at lowest level, then inquire and report on
upper levels.
• Middle-out budgeting: Enter budget amounts at lowest level, then inquire and report on
upper levels.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 14

EMAK
Define a Budget
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laa Budget
a n s
Define
M n-t r
o the budget Name and Description.
•nEnter
• Enter the status of your budget.
- Open: The budget is available for update and budget entry.
- Current: The budget is open, and is the default budget for most budgeting and inquiry
forms.
- Frozen: The budget is unavailable for update or budget entry.
• (Optional) Choose to create journals to maintain an audit trail.
• Enter the First and Last periods of your budget. You can enter a range of up to 60 periods.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 15

EMAK
Open Budget Year

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 16

EMAK
Master-Detail Budgets
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la raBudgets
Master-Detail
M n-t
no hierarchies enable you to control budgeting authority, and easily identify budgets
Budgeting
that exceed control limits. They also allow you to perform top down budgeting and identify
where the discrepancies are.
Define master budgets using the Define Budget window.
• Enter a name and period range, then open the budget year.
• Master budget organizations:
- The master budget organization should include only the accounts that represent
higher-level budgeting.
- If you have master budgets at different hierarchy levels, define a separate
organization for each level of master budgets.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 17

EMAK
Budgets Using FSG Reports

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Using
a n s
Budgets
M n-t r FSG Reports
noYou cannot reference reporting hierarchies in formulas, allocations, or online inquiries.
Note:
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 18

EMAK
Multiple Versions of a Budget

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 19

EMAK
Define Budget Organizations

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laBudget
a n s
Define
M n-t r Organizations
o
•nBudgeting hierarchies enable you to control budgeting authority, and easily identify
budgets that exceed control limits. They also allow you to perform top down budgeting
and identify where the discrepancies are.
• Contain ranges of accounts that make up the budget.
• Represent departments, cost centers, divisions, or other groups for which you enter and
maintain budget data.
• Options:
- ALL budget organization
- Password to restrict access
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 20

EMAK
Features of Budget Organizations

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la ofrBudget
Features
M n-t Organizations
o and report on data for a budget organization.
•nInquire
• Freeze the budget for a budget organization, while still working on the data for other
budget organizations.
• Set up security for a budget organization to restrict access.
• Set up an ALL budget organization to include all account ranges.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 21

EMAK
Budget Organization Window

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laOrganization
Budget
M n-t r Window
nocan use the Define Budget Organization window to perform the AutoCopy, Ranges, and
You
Assignments actions as well as the following functions:
• Delete: Choose Delete to launch the delete budget organization program for the current
organization. Note that you do not have to delete all account assignments from a budget
organization before deleting that budget organization.
• Maintain: Choose Maintain to launch a concurrent process that adds newly created
account combinations or deletes recently disabled account combinations for a budget
organization.
• Oracle General Ledger only assigns account combinations that fall within the account
ranges associated with a budget organization.
• You can run this program periodically to remove disabled accounts or add new account
combinations.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 22

EMAK
AutoCopy Budget Organizations

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Budget
a n s
AutoCopy
M n-t r Organizations
o the Define Budget Organization window, and select the budget organization you
•nOpen
want to copy from.
• Enter Segment Overrides to select the account segment values you want to change for the
new budget organization.
- You must designate at least one segment override because you cannot assign identical
accounts to multiple budget organizations.
• Enter the Override Segment Value next to the segments you wish to override.
- For example, if you want to copy the accounts in CC #100 (the source budget
organization) to CC #300, enter the value 300 as the CC segment override. Oracle
General Ledger will then copy all of the account ranges for cost center #100, but will
change all CC values to 300.
- If you specify a segment override for a dependent segment, you must enter an
override segment for the segments on which it depends.
• When you save your work, a concurrent process is automatically submitted.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 23

EMAK
Assign Account Ranges

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laAccount
a n s
Assign
M n-t r Ranges
o the Account Ranges: The ranges cannot overlap other account ranges with the same
•nEnter
currency for any budget organization in that ledger.
• Select the budget entry type for each range.
- Use "Entered" to enter budget amounts and journals, upload budgets, or transfer
budget amounts.
- Use "Calculated" to enter budget formulas or use MassBudget journals to enter
budget amounts.
• Enter the Currency for each account range.
- If you selected the "Entered" budget entry type, you can enter any enabled currency.
- If you selected the "Calculated" budget entry type, you must enter the functional
currency for your ledger or STAT.
• Save your work. A concurrent process is automatically submitted to search the GL
combinations table for existing code combinations within the range specified. Wait for the
process to finish before entering specific accounts.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 24

EMAK
Add/Change Account Ranges

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la raAccount
Add/Change
M n-t Ranges
o
•nNavigate to the Range Assignments window.
• Change the account ranges.
- Specific accounts must be within the designated account range.
- Existing combinations within the range will be automatically added to an
organization.
- New combinations must be added in the Range Assignments window.
• When you save your work, the Maintain Budget Organization program is run.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 25

EMAK
Removing Account Ranges

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Account
a n s
Removing
M n-t r Ranges
o
•nNavigate to the Range Assignments window.
- To remove an account temporarily, delete its row. The range will still exist for
temporarily deleted accounts. It will be recreated when the Maintain Budget
Organization program is run.
- To delete accounts permanently, open the Account Ranges window and delete the
range that includes the accounts you want to delete.
• When you save your work, the Maintain Budget Organization program is run.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 26

EMAK
Delete a Budget Organization

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 27

EMAK
Budget Entry Methods

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laEntrya n s
Budget
M n-t r Methods
noBudget Amounts
Enter
• Use a quick, manual approach for adjustments; use budget rules to base amounts on prior
actuals or budgets.
Enter Budget Journals
• Create an audit trail of amounts entered.
Use the Desktop Integrator Budget Wizard
• Create a new budget in an Excel spreadsheet or download an existing budget to an Excel
spreadsheet for modification, then upload the revised budget to Oracle General Ledger.
Upload Budgets
• Upload budget data from an external source.
Create Budget Formulas
• Create standard or formula recurring entries.
• Use for complex allocations.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 28

EMAK
Create MassBudget Journals

• Quickly create budget allocation entries from a single formula to match your actual
allocations.
Transfer Budget Amounts
• Transfer fixed amounts or a portion of a budget balance from one account to another.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 29

EMAK
Journals Created?
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Created?
a n s
Journals
M n-t r
noyou define a budget, you choose whether to require budget journals for your budget. If
When
you enabled the Require Budget Journals flag for your ledger, this option will already be
selected and cannot be changed.
When you require budget journals, you can only use budget entry methods that create journals,
namely budget journals, MassBudgets, budget transfers, consolidation of budget balances, and
the Applications Desktop Integrator's Journal Wizard.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 30

EMAK
Budget Entry Modes

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laEntrya n s
Budget
M n-t r Modes
nobudget amounts to replace any existing budget balances.
Enter
You can:
• Use Single Row Mode to enter budget amounts for each account in the budget
organization one-by-one.
• Use Worksheet Mode to enter budgets for several accounts at once.
• Use budget rules to distribute budget amounts for all periods.
• Enter statistical budget amounts.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 31

EMAK
Entering Budget Amounts

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Budget
a n s
Entering
M n-t r Amounts
nocan apply budget rules for up to 13 periods at a time; if your calendar contains more than
You
13 periods, each year is automatically divided into several period ranges.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 32

EMAK
Budget Rules
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laRulesa n s
Budget
M n-t r
o Evenly: Evenly distribute the amount you enter across all accounting periods. You
•nDivide
can set rounding options to handle any undistributed amount resulting from rounding
calculations.
• Repeat Per period: Repeat the amount you enter in each accounting period.
• Prior Year Budget Monetary* and Prior Year Budget Statistical*: Multiply the amount
you enter by the prior year budget balance.
• Current Year Budget Monetary* and Current Year Budget Statistical*: Multiply the
amount you enter by the current year budget balance.
• Prior Year Actual Monetary* and Current Year Budget Statistical*: Multiply the amount
you enter by the prior year actual balance.
• Current Year Actual Monetary* and Current Year Actual Statistical*: Multiply the amount
you enter by the current year actual balance.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 33

EMAK
Budget Rules and Your Calendar

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laRulesa n s
Budget
M n-t r and Your Calendar
no calendar uses 12 or 13 periods per year, you can set rounding options to handle any
If your
undistributed amount resulting from rounding calculations. Use a 4/5/5, a 4/5/4, or a 5/4/4
configuration for spreading amounts throughout each quarter.
Set rounding options to handle differences resulting from amounts that cannot be divided
evenly.
You can specify these rounding options:
• Ignore rounding errors
• Post the rounding differences to a specific budget period
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 34

EMAK
Budget Journals Process

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laJournals
a n s
Budget
M n-t r Process
o accounts and amounts in budget journals.
•nEnter
• Run Journal Import to create unposted journals based on the accounts and amounts you
entered.
• Post the journals created to update budget balances.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 35

EMAK
Entering Budget Journals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 36

EMAK
Budget Journal Features

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laJournal
a n s
Budget r
M n-t Features
o budget rules to calculate budget journal amounts.
•nUse
• Enter statistical budget journals for accounts that are assigned a currency of STAT.
• Review and change your budget journals before posting them.
• Post the journal amounts to update existing budget balances
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 37

EMAK
Calculating and Translating Budget Amounts

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la randa n s
Calculating
M n-t Translating Budget Amounts
no budgets can be set up to calculate the same way actuals are calculated.
Oracle
For example, if you allocate total benefit costs to cost centers based on headcount, you can
budget headcount and total benefit costs, and let Oracle General Ledger created detailed cost
center budgets for you.
Oracle budget balances can be translated to create budget versus actual reports in reporting
currencies.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 38

EMAK
Budget Translation Overview

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laTranslation
Budget
M n-t r Overview
o
(N)nCurrency > Translation
Use the Translate Balances window to translate your budget account balances from your
functional currency to another currency.
• Enter the Source budget whose account balances you want to translate
• Ensure that the budget year containing the period you are translating is open in your
source budget
• Enter the Target budget that you want to calculate translated account balances for (you can
translate one source into one or more target budgets)
• You should not translate more than one source budget into the same target budget for the
same period and currency, because each source budget translation overrides the balances
in the target budget.
• If you use reporting currencies, budget amounts and budget journals are not converted to
the reporting currencies.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 39

EMAK
Transfer Budget Overview

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 40

EMAK
Transfer Budget Process

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Budget
a n s
Transfer
M n-t r Process
o can transfer budget amounts from one account to another within any budget
•nYou
• The accounts may belong to the same or different budget organizations
• You can transfer fixed amounts or a percentage of an account's balance
• When you leave the Budget Transfer window, Oracle General Ledger automatically runs
Journal Import to create an unposted budget journal batch
• To update your budget balances, post the budget journal batch
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 41

EMAK
Transfer Budget Amounts Example

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 42

EMAK
Transfer Budget Percentage Example

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 43

EMAK
Transfer with Budgetary Control

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la witha n s
Transfer
M n-t r Budgetary Control
o
•nBudgetary control refers to the process of recording budget data and tracking encumbrance
and actual data against a budget. You can track budget or encumbrance data using one of
two methods: encumbrance accounting or budgetary accounts.
• Funds checking is the feature of budgetary control that helps prevent overspending
budgets by verifying available funds online before processing a transaction. With funds
checking, you can verify transactions online against available budget, immediately update
funds available for approved transactions, and control expenditures at the detail or
summary level.
• If you use funds checking, you must use either encumbrance accounting or the budgetary
accounts method of tracking budget data.
• Additional Steps with Budgetary Control
- Choose the Check Funds button to verify available funds for your budget journal
batch.
- Choose the Reserve Funds button to reserve funds for your budget journal batch.
- Review the Funds Status for your batch:
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 44

EMAK
- Choose View Results to review the budgetary control transactions resulting from your
funds action request.
- Leave the window. General Ledger automatically runs the Create Journals program to
create an approved budget journal after a successful funds reservation.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 45

EMAK
Finalize Budgets
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 46

EMAK
Correcting Budgets
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 47

EMAK
Budget Journal Entries?

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 48

EMAK
No Budget Journal Entries?

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 49

EMAK
Freeze Budgets
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laBudgets
a n s
Freeze
M n-t r
o Freeze Budget window to freeze a budget, budget organization, budget formula batch,
Usenthe
or range of budget account combinations to prevent accidental or unauthorized changes
• You can also freeze or unfreeze an entire budget by changing the budget status in the
Define Budget window
• You can unfreeze any budget or budget element that is currently frozen
• When you freeze budget organizations, you cannot budget to the account combinations
belonging to that budget organization for the budget specified.
• When you freeze formulas or ranges of account combinations, you cannot use those
formulas or budget to those account combinations for the budget specified.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 50

EMAK
Budget Inquiry Overview

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laInquiry
a n s
Budget
M n-t r Overview
nocan review your budget data online with these two methods:
You
• Account Inquiry—Use this method when you want to view specific account balances
• Budget Inquiry—Use this method when you want to review master and detail budgets
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 51

EMAK
Performing Account Inquiry

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rAccount
a n s
Performing
M n-t Inquiry
o > Account
(N)nInquiry
Use the account inquiry feature to view actual, budget, and encumbrance account balances for
a specific period or periods in either entered or balance level reporting currencies.
You can select one of three buttons to access the type of account information you want to view:
• Show Balances: Displays PTD and YTD account balances by period for both detail and
summary accounts.
• Show Journal Details: Lists all the journal batches and entries that affect the account
balance. From here you can drill down to the full journal entry and subledger transaction.
• Show Variance: Displays actual vs. budget or encumbrance amounts and the variance for
PTD, QTD, YTD, and PJTD (project-to-date) time periods. Variance goes from Summary
to Detail to Journal Details.
Note: The Account Inquiry window displays balances from posted budget journal entries and
entered budget amounts. To get the most up-to-date account balance information, be sure all
budget journal entries are posted. Drill down from an account inquiry to review your budget
journal detail (only if budget amount was entered using a budget journal).
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 52

EMAK
Reviewing Variances Between Account Balance Types

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Variances
a n s
Reviewing
M n-t r Between Account Balance Types
o > Account > (B) Show Variance
(N)nInquiry
• You can compare balances between any primary and secondary account type, such as:
- Actual and budget
- Budget and budget
- Actual and encumbrance
• You must specify a primary and secondary balance type and select a budget or
encumbrance type in order to compare balance amounts.
Note: You cannot include variances in your Account Inquiry if you choose to inquire on all
currencies.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 53

EMAK
Budget Inquiry Window

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laInquiry
a n s
Budget
M n-t r Window
noyou perform an inquiry on a master budget, you can choose any of these Inquiry Types:
When
• Drilldown this Budget
- View master budgets, then drill down to the detail accounts
• Query Detail Budgets
- View master and detail budgets together, then drill down to the detail accounts
• Query Budget Violations Only
- View only those periods for which the sum of the detail budget balances exceeds the
master budget balance
• When you perform an inquiry on a detail budget, you can choose only the Drilldown this
Budget Inquiry Type, and then drill down to the detail accounts.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 54

EMAK
Drilldown This Budget

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la This
a n s
Drilldown
M n-t r Budget
o enter Summary Accounts or use Summary account templates to start finding
•nMust
balances.
• Can be done on all budgets.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 55

EMAK
Query Detail Budgets and Violations Only

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
laDetailraBudgets
Query
M n-t and Violations Only
o Detail Budgets only works on Master budgets
•nQuery
• Query Budget Violations Only
- Only works on Master budgets
- Review only those periods for which the sum of the detail budget balances exceeds
the master budget balance.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 56

EMAK
Two Wizards - Overview

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ra-nOverview
Two Wizards
M n-t
noADI includes the Budget Wizard and Journal Wizard to simplify your budgeting work
Web
with Oracle General Ledger.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 57

EMAK
Budget Wizard: Overview

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laWizard:
a n s
Budget r
M n-t Overview
o Budget Wizard within Oracle General Ledger's Desktop Integrator to automatically
Usenthe
build a budget spreadsheet based on the budgets and budget organizations you set up within
The Budget Wizard provides an Excel spreadsheet-based budget entry screen which facilitates
simple data entry and modeling in a disconnected environment.
With the Budget Wizard, you can
• Download existing budget balances from Oracle General Ledger or create a new budget.
• Enter your new budget balances manually, use budget rules, or use formulas and models.
• Automatically graph your budgets and compare budget and actual balances using a variety
of graph styles.
• Save a budget spreadsheet on your PC and work on it at any time, including using it for
future years.
When you are satisfied with your budget, you can automatically upload your new budget
balances into Oracle General Ledger.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 58

EMAK
Budget Wizard Key Benefits

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laWizard
a n s
Budget
M n-t r Key Benefits
o
•nEliminates double maintenance by combining a spreadsheet with the budget elements that
you define in Oracle General Ledger.
• Automatically calculates your budget amounts using any type of formula.
• Provides a clear picture of how your budget and actual amounts compare for a wide range
of accounts.
• Allows you to justify or explain your budget using budget notes; no external
documentation or paperwork is required.
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 59

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 60

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 61

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Budgeting
Chapter 9 - Page 62

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
ah ent G
Consolidations
y
0
Chapter0 0@ Stud
11
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 1

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 2

EMAK
Consolidations
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 3

EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 4

EMAK
Overview of Consolidations
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la ofraConsolidations
Overview
M n-t
o
Thenconsolidation process combines the financial results of different companies, typically
combining subsidiary accounting information into a parent company for reporting purposes.
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 5

EMAK
Consolidation Tools
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ranToolss
Consolidation
M n-t
no Statement Generator (FSG)
Financial
• Use Financial Statement Generator (FSG) to consolidate financial information for
businesses using a single ledger or businesses using different ledgers that share the same
calendar and chart of accounts.
• Use recurring journals, mass allocation journals, and standard journals to create
intercompany elimination journal entries for multiple companies sharing the same ledger.
Global Consolidation System (GCS)
• Use Global Consolidation System (GCS) to consolidate financial information for multiple
ledgers, diverse financial systems, and geographic locations, including both Oracle and
non-Oracle applications.
• Use the Consolidation Workbench in GCS to:
- Access windows used to perform each consolidation activity.
- Monitor the status of your consolidation.
- View history of past consolidations.
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 6

EMAK
Consolidating Multiple Companies Sharing a Single Ledger

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ranMultiple
Consolidating
M n-t Companies Sharing a Single Ledger
o Financial Statement Generator (FSG) to create consolidated financial statements at the
Usenthe
parent level if:
• Your companies share the same ledger. Because all of your companies' information is
already contained in the same ledger, you do not need to create mapping rules or transfer
data. You simply need to enter the elimination journal entries to eliminate any
intercompany transactions, then run FSG reports.
• Your companies use different ledgers on the same database instance, that share the same
chart of accounts and accounting calendar, but have different currencies. Because FSG
reports can be defined across ledgers, you can still use FSGs to create consolidated
statements. Simply run translation in the subsidiaries' ledger, then define FSGs across
ledgers using the "Translated" currency type.
• You can segregate eliminating entries by creating an elimination company and using
parent/child hierarchies to address FSG consolidations.
For more information, refer to the Oracle General Ledger User Guide or 11i General Ledger
Financial Management Fundamental Financial Reporting.
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 7

EMAK
Consolidating Multiple Companies with Multiple Ledgers

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ranMultiple
Consolidating
M n-t Companies with Multiple Ledgers
no do not share the same currency, calendar, or chart of accounts reside in separate
Companies
ledgers, and, possibly, separate instances, or non-Oracle applications. With the Global
Consolidation System, you can:
• Consolidate the results of multiple organizations, with different ledgers that use different
currencies, calendars, and charts of accounts.
• Initiate consolidations from your parent ledger or subsidiary ledger.
• Consolidate actual amounts as well as budget amounts.
• Consolidate account balances or transactions.
• Create automatic intercompany eliminations.
Note: You may use the Advanced Global Intercompany System (AGIS) to enter intercompany
transactions. Then, you use GCS to create your eliminating entries.
• Consolidate the results of multiple organizations on multiple database instances.
Note: If you want to consolidate budgets, your parent and subsidiary ledgers must share the
same calendar and functional currency.
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 8

EMAK
Global Consolidation System (GCS) Features and Benefits

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laConsolidation
Global
M n-t r System (GCS) Features and Benefits
no
Consolidation Workbench:
• View the status of your consolidation and monitor subsidiary account balances for any
changes that occur after the subsidiary data has been transferred.
Mapping Rules:
• Determine how your subsidiary account balances roll up into the parent.
State Controller:
• Access to every form you need for consolidations and guides you through the
consolidation process.
Consolidation Hierarchy Viewer:
• View the multilevel structure of your consolidation mapping in a graphical format to see
relationships and analyze ledger information.
Interface Data Transformer:
• The Interface Data Transformer (IDT) is a user-friendly tool that makes importing of data
from external feeder systems into Oracle General Ledger or Oracle Global Consolidation
System much easier and less time-consuming.
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 9

EMAK
Global Consolidation System (GCS) Features and Benefits

(continued)
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
noConsolidation System (GCS) Features and Benefits
Global
Automatic Elimination Entries:
• Automatically generate journal entries to eliminate intercompany balances based on rules
you define.
Multilevel Drilldown:
• Drill down to access account balances, journal entries, and subledger transactions.
Reporting:
• Generate standard or custom reports that can be published to a text file, spreadsheet, or
web site for review and analysis.
Integrated Analysis:
• Perform multidimensional analysis of consolidated financial data using Oracle Enterprise
Planning and Budgeting.
- Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting is tightly integrated with Oracle General
Ledger.
Consolidations
Chapter 11 - Page 10

EMAK
- After consolidating your companies' information, you can analyze the data using
multiple scenarios.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Consolidating Data in Multiple Instances

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ranDatas
Consolidating
M n-t in Multiple Instances
nohave companies that do not share the same instance, you can do the following:
If you
• Revalue and translate subsidiary amounts if you want to normalize the currency to the
parent's functional currency.
• Run a trial balance in the subsidiary ledger and use the trial balance to create journal
entries in a spreadsheet.
• Use Web ADI to upload the journal entry created in the spreadsheet data to a dummy
ledger defined in the parent company's instance.
Note: The dummy ledger is defined like any other ledger. The structure should match that of
the original ledger in the other instance.
As an alternative to the Web ADI extract, you can also use SQL*Plus and load the contents of
the flat file into the GL_INTERFACE table. You can then upload the data into the GCS
instance using journal import. This method requires support from your MIS department.
After you have all the data in a single instance, you can:
• Use GCS to map accounts from your dummy ledger to your parent ledger.
• Transfer data.
Consolidations

EMAK
• Create eliminating entries.

• Consolidate results.
Note: The same concepts apply for non-Oracle Instances. If you have subsidiary data using
non-Oracle systems, you can map and load the data through Web ADI or SQL*Plus into the
GL Interface table.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Interface Data Transformer (IDT) Description

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Data a n s
Interface
M n-t r Transformer (IDT) Description
o
ThenInterface Data Transformer (IDT) is a user-friendly tool that makes importing of data from
external feeder systems into Oracle General Ledger or Oracle Global Consolidation System
much easier and less time-consuming.
IDT takes data from external feeder systems that have been loaded into the GL_INTERFACE
table and transforms it into the proper format for import into Oracle General Ledger based on
rules you define. Instead of having to manually map the values from the external system into a
format acceptable by the target system, you can create Transformation Rules and apply them to
the external data to have them automatically mapped for you. Each time you import data, you
can simply reapply the same rules.
Consolidations

EMAK
Interface Data Transformer (IDT) Benefits

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Data a n s
Interface
M n-t r Transformer (IDT) Benefits
o
Thenfollowing benefits can be achieved by using the Interface Data Transformer:
• Interface Data Transformer makes importing data from Non-Oracle Systems much easier
because it reduces the manual effort required to convert disparate data formats into a
format Oracle recognizes and accepts.
• By defining reusable rules, you can reapply the same rules each time you transfer data
from external systems into Oracle General Ledger or Global Consolidation System.
• You can feel safe that the data is valid and will not corrupt your existing data because IDT
validates the imported data for you every time.
• IDT is very flexible. By applying conditions, you can address those special circumstances
and control when the Transformation Rules should be applied.
Consolidations

EMAK
Interface Data Transformer (IDT) Rule Set Description

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Data a n s
Interface
M n-t r Transformer (IDT) Rule Set Description
noSets control how your data in the GL_INTERFACE table is transformed.
Rule
• A rule set is composed of a stage, which is a grouping of rules.
• The output of a stage in a rule set is used as an input in the subsequent stage.
• Rules are composed of conditions, derivations, and a validation.
• Conditions determine when a derivation should be applied.
• A derivation can be performed either through string manipulation, a PL/SQL function, or
through a Lookup Table.
• Validation can be performed to check the results of a rule. You can use a value set or a
lookup table to validate the results of a rule.
Users must first define a Ledger in Oracle GL to act as the target for mapping. The new
Transformation Rule Set feature will allow users to transform data from a source to a target,
regardless of the table structure of the source or target table.
Consolidations

EMAK
Interface Data Transformer String Function Example

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Data
a n s
Interface
M n-t r Transformer String Function Example
nofunctions enable you to parse and concatenate substrings. For example, you can take
String
values from multiple columns in the external system and combine them into a concatenated
value in the target system.
Consolidations

EMAK
Interface Data Transformer PL/SQL Function Example

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Data
a n s
Interface
M n-t r Transformer PL/SQL Function Example
no Functions perform more sophisticated transformations, such as calculations. You can
PL/SQL
calculate amounts stored in separate columns in the external system and store the result in the
target system.
Consolidations

EMAK
Interface Data Transformer Lookup Table Example

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Data
a n s
Interface
M n-t r Transformer Lookup Table Example
no Tables convert one value into another. Thus if value "B" is specified in the external
Lookup
system, you can convert that value to "Budget" in the target system.
Consolidations

EMAK
Interface Data Transformer Steps

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Data a n s
Interface
M n-t r Transformer Steps
o
(N)nInterface Data Transformer > Define
The first step is to define a Transformation Rule Set. Here, you specify how you want to
transform the data using Lookup Tables, PL/SQL Functions, or String Functions.
Then you need to load your raw external data into the GL_INTERFACE table using SQL
Loader or some other loader program.
Be sure to specify a Source and Group ID in your flat file. This information will be referenced
when you apply the Transformation Rule Set to this data.
The last step is to run the program called GL Interface Data Transformer.
(N) Interface Data Transformer > Run
The GL Interface Data Transformer program takes the data in the GL_INTERFACE table and
transforms it into the correct format based on your Transformation Rule Set.
Here, you can also choose to submit the Journal Import program. You can also run Journal
Import separately after the transformation has occurred.
If there are any errors, you can correct them in the Correct Journal Import form and rerun
Journal Import.
Consolidations

EMAK
Other Uses for Global Consolidation System

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laUsesrfor
a n s
Other
M n-t Global Consolidation System
nocan use the Global Consolidation System for other activities besides consolidation.
You
Changing Charts of Accounts
If you decide to change your chart of accounts after it has been implemented, you can use GCS
to map account values from the old chart of accounts to the new chart of accounts.
To do this, you must:
• Create a new ledger with the desired chart of accounts structure.
• Use GCS to map account values from the old ledger' chart of accounts to the new ledger.
• Transfer historical balances or transactions from the old ledger into the new ledger.
Changing the Accounting Calendar
If you change your accounting calendar after it has been implemented, you can use GCS to
map account balances from the periods in the old ledger into the new periods in the new ledger.
This is similar to the previous process used when changing your chart of accounts.:
• Create a new ledger with the desired accounting calendar.
• Use GCS to copy account values from the old ledger’s chart of accounts to the new ledger.
Consolidations

EMAK
• Transfer historical balances or transactions from the period in the old ledger to the period
in the new ledger.
Considerations for Using GCS When Making Changes
GCS is particularly useful during implementations after you have uploaded historical balances
into Oracle General Ledger. If the accounting calendar or chart of accounts changes, you can
use GCS to perform account mapping and then transfer balances period by period into a new
ledger.
Caution: If you decide to change your ledger after you have turned on Multi-Org for your
subledgers and entered transactions using your subledgers, you should take additional
precautions. Switching your ledger under these conditions may have serious ramifications to
your data integrity because all historical subledger transactions point to the old ledger and all
new subledger transactions point to a new ledger.
Using GCS with the Subledger Accounting
Companies using the Subledger Accounting Dual Posting solution can use Global
s
Consolidation System (GCS) to transfer subledger transactions, other than Payables and a
h
) ฺa
Receivables transactions, to another ledger to create alternative accounting representations of
o m
their accounting data.
o o ฺc uide
ah ent G
The Subledger Accounting Dual Posting solution enables you to transfer a single Payables or
y
Receivables transaction to two ledgers that use different accounting rules. Subledger
0 0@ Stud
Accounting Dual Posting only addresses transactions from Payables and Receivables. Other
0
s 2 this
transactions that require a second accounting representation can be transferred to the second
e
g e rg use
ledger using GCS. Global Consolidation System (GCS) allows you to synchronize transactions
l a k_ e to
between the source and target ledgers by allowing you to retain journal batch names and
a ns
descriptions and allowing you to exclude the transfer of journals by journal category.
( m c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Consolidation Workbench
s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ranWorkbench
Consolidation
M n-t
o
ThenConsolidation Workbench provides a central point of control for consolidating an
unlimited number of subsidiaries to your parent. This window provides feedback on the state of
the consolidation process, keeping you informed about each subsidiary's consolidation status.
The workbench also monitors subsidiary account balances for any changes that occur after the
subsidiary data has been transferred to your parent ledger.
Consolidation Sets
You can even create consolidation sets which launch multiple consolidations in a single step
for overall streamlining of the consolidation process.
Consolidation Hierarchies
Finally, you can create consolidation hierarchies, or multilevel hierarchies, and view your
consolidation hierarchies using a graphical Consolidation Hierarchy Viewer.
State Controller
From the Consolidation Workbench you can access the State Controller, which is a color-
coded navigation tool to guide you through the consolidation process.
Consolidations

EMAK
Consolidation Workbench (continued)

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ranWorkbench
Consolidation
M n-t (continued)
o
(N)nConsolidation > Workbench
When you navigate to the Consolidation Workbench, the Find Consolidation Processes
window opens. This window works with the Consolidation Workbench to help you find
consolidation and elimination processes. Enter a query in the Find Consolidation Processes
window. The results are displayed in the Consolidation Workbench.
Using the Find Consolidation Processes Window
To narrow the search for a consolidation process, enter search criteria in as many of the
following fields as you like:
• Parent: Parent ledger.
• Parent Period: Consolidation period.
• Balance Type: Actual, Balance, or Any.
• Mapping Set: Group of mappings.
• Mapping: Single mapping.
• Subsidiary: Subsidiary ledger.
• Status: Consolidation status.
Consolidations

EMAK
• Elimination Set: Fully reciprocal elimination entries.

• Elimination Status: List of eleven different status of eliminations.
Note: Using the Find Consolidation Processes window refreshes data displayed in the
Consolidation Workbench. When you generate, post, or reverse consolidation journals,
navigate to the Find Consolidation Processes window and select the Find button to refresh the
data displayed. Alternatively, you can choose View > Find All from the menu bar.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Using the State Controller

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a lathe State
a n s
Using r
M n-t Controller
o State Controller as a short cut to navigate directly to consolidation mapping and
Usenthe
elimination definition windows.
The State Controller buttons correspond to one of the functional steps of a consolidation so you
can quickly access the consolidation step you want to perform.
When you select a subsidiary from the Consolidation Workbench, the State Controller buttons
change color based on which steps you have performed or need to perform for the subsidiary.
Each button on the State Controller opens the related General Ledger window.
(N) Consolidation > Define > Mapping
There are navigation paths corresponding to the buttons that open General Ledger forms and
windows:
• Button—Mapping
• General Ledger Window—Consolidation Mappings
• Navigation—(N) Consolidation > Define > Mapping
Consolidations

EMAK
• Button—Mapping Sets
• General Ledger Window—Consolidation Mapping Sets
• Navigation—(N) Consolidation > Define > Mapping Sets
• Button—Translation Status
• General Ledger Window—Translation Statuses

• Navigation—This is available only with the State Controller
• Button—Transfer
• General Ledger Window—Transfer Consolidation Data
• Navigation—(N) Consolidation > Transfer > Data
• Button—Transfer Set
s a
• General Ledger Window—Transfer Consolidation Data Set h
) ฺa
o m
• Navigation—(N) Consolidation > Transfer > Data Set
o o ฺc uide
y a h nt G
• Button—Review Journal
0 0 @ tude
• General Ledger Window—Enter Journals 20
s i s S
• Navigation—(N) Journals > Enter rg e e t h
e s
l a k_g e to u
• Button—Post
( m a ns
c e
s e li Journals
• General Ledger
r g eWindow—Post
l > Post
e
• Navigation—(N) a b
Journals
l a k G nsfer
M•aButton—Elimination
n - tra Set
o
•nGeneral Ledger Window—Elimination Set
• Navigation—(N) Consolidation > Elimination > Define
• Button—Eliminate
• General Ledger Window—Generate Eliminations
• Navigation—(N) Consolidation > Elimination > Generate
• Button—Report (Standard)
• General Ledger Window—Submit Request
• Navigation—Reports > Request > Standard
• Button—Report (Financial)
• General Ledger Window—Run Financial Report
• Navigation—Reports > Request > Financial
Consolidations

EMAK
State Controller Button Colors

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a ansButton Colors
lController
M n-tr
State
no a State Controller button accesses the General Ledger window to complete that step.
Selecting
To help guide you in completing your consolidation steps, the State Controller buttons are
displayed in one of three colors:
• Blue - Recommended
• Gray - Not recommended
• Red - Warning
When you select a subsidiary from the Consolidation Workbench, the State Controller's
buttons change color based on which steps you have performed or need to perform for that
subsidiary. After you successfully complete a consolidation step, the State Controller buttons
may change color to reflect the current status.
For example, the Review Journal button is light gray until data has been transferred. After the
consolidation journal entry is generated, it appears in blue, to indicate that reviewing the
consolidation journal is now a recommended step. If previously translated data has changed
since the transfer, or the translation rate has changed, the translation status button turns red to
warn you that you need to re-run translation.
Consolidations

EMAK
Defining a Consolidation Mapping

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la a Consolidation
Defining
M n-t r Mapping
o
(N)nConsolidation > Define > Mapping
• You must define or modify a consolidation mapping for each subsidiary ledger you want
to consolidate. The mapping identifies the parent and subsidiary ledgers. The mapping
rules control the consolidation of data into the parent ledger.
• Consolidation mappings include identifying the parent and subsidiary, the method,
currency, effective dates, consolidation run options, segment mapping rules, account
mapping rules and usage type.
Selecting a Consolidation Method
• When the consolidation is run, consolidation journal entries are created in the parent
ledger.
Balances:
• Select Balances to consolidate actual, average, translated, budget, or statistical balances.
This method does not include journal entry detail. If you choose the Balances method, the
resulting consolidation journal entries includes the account balances for all the subsidiaries
that were run. For example, if a subsidiary had five transactions that made up the balance
Consolidations

EMAK
of the sales account, the consolidation journal entry includes the balance of the sales
account, not the individual transactions.
Note: You must use this method if you want to consolidate balances from your subsidiaries'
summary accounts.
Transactions:
• Select Transactions to consolidate actual journal entry detail from a subsidiary ledger.
This method allows you to selectively consolidate individual journal entries. This method
is particularly useful if you want to make incremental updates if new journals are entered
after you run consolidation. Instead of reversing the original consolidation batch, which is
the case for the Balances consolidation method, you can transfer the additional journal
entry and post it to update the consolidated balances. If you choose the Transactions
method, the resulting consolidation journal entries include the transactions for all the
subsidiaries that are run. For example, if a subsidiary has five transactions booked to the
sales account, the consolidation journal entry includes the summation of all five
a
transactions. If you want each transaction to be listed in the parent ledger as five separate
s
h a
transactions, you need to run the transfer five separate times.
) ฺ
o m
Note: You can only use this method if both ledgers have the same functional currency.
o o ฺc uide
• If you have average balance processing enabled, your parent should be defined as a non-
y ah ent G
consolidation ledger with average balances enabled.
Entering a Currency
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
• Enter the currency to use for the consolidation. This is the same as the functional currency
e rg use
for the parent. You can also select STAT.
g
a k_ e to
• Consolidating Books with Average Balance Processing Enabled
l
( m a ns
e
• For average balance processing, optionally select a default Usage type such as standard,
c
r g es le li
average, or both to transfer standard, average, or both balances to the parent ledger.
Ge ferab
• Hint: You can create separate consolidation mappings for standard and average balances.
k
a la rans
This is helpful if you want to use different mapping rules to get different levels of detail.
M n-t For example, you might map standard balances to view consolidated totals for each cost
no center or average balances to view consolidated totals for each company.
Note: Standard defaults if you choose Transactions as the consolidation method. For more
information, refer to the Oracle General Ledger User Guide or the 11i General Ledger
Financial Management Advanced Topic Average Balance Processing.
Consolidations

EMAK
Mapping Rules
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Rulesa n s
Mapping
M n-t r
no a Mapping Rule
Selecting
Select a Mapping Rule to specify how to consolidate balances or transactions from your
subsidiary to your parent. Your choices include segment rules, account rules, or a combination
of both.
Segment rules are preferable to account rules because:
• Defining consolidation mapping is quicker and easier. For example, if your parent account
has only three segments, you can map an entire subsidiary's chart of accounts with just
three segment rules.
• Running consolidations based on segment rules is faster than those based on account rules.
Changing Mapping Rules
Save your work after you have set up your consolidation mapping. Once saved, you cannot
modify your rollup rules, except to change the parent and subsidiary segment detail values. To
change a rollup rule, delete it and create a new one.
Consolidations

EMAK
Using Account Mapping Rules

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laAccount
a n s
Using
M n-t r Mapping Rules
no Rules: Enter the Subsidiary Accounts and the Parent Account to which you want to
Account
map each subsidiary account range.
• Example 1: Map subsidiary account 02.300.5410.100 to account 01.5000.100 in your
parent ledger.
• Example 2: Map the entire range of subsidiary accounts 02.400.5400.100 through
02.400.6999.100 to account 01.5200.100 in your parent ledger.
Note: Run new consolidations in audit mode to ensure that your account mappings are correct.
The audit mode allows you to run several audit reports to help you verify that your mappings
are set up correctly.
Consolidations

EMAK
Using Segment Mapping Rules

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laSegment
a n s
Using r
M n-t Mapping Rules
no Rules
Segment
Enter the parent segment name to which each subsidiary is mapped, an Action, and the
Subsidiary segment name. For example, you can map your subsidiary's Department segment to
your parent's Cost Center segment. You can use only one action for each parent segment.
Mapping Rule Actions Rule Description
Copy Value From Copies all values in your subsidiary segment to the same
values in your parent segment. The segments do not have to
use the same value set, but must use the same segment
values.
Assign Single Value Assigns one specific value that is used for the parent
segment. You must enter the value that the parent chart of
accounts uses. Use this rule when your parent account has
more segments than your subsidiary account.
Use Rollup Rules From Maps values from your subsidiary segments to your parent
segments using the rules specified in the Rollup Rules
region.
Consolidations

EMAK
Using Segment Rollup Rules

s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laSegment
a n s
Using r
M n-t Rollup Rules
nomust define a rollup rule for any segment value mapping rules that are assigned the action
You
Use Rollup Rules From.
A rollup rule tells General Ledger what detail level of information to transfer and how to roll
that information up into the parent. There are four rollup rules possible:
• Transfer Level—Detail
• Using—Detail Ranges
• Results—Maps a range of detail values from subsidiary ledger into one detail value in
parent ledger.
• Transfer Level—Detail
• Using—Parent
• Results—Maps a parent value from subsidiary ledger into a detail value in parent ledger.
Consolidations

EMAK
• Transfer Level—Summary
• Using—Parent
• Results—Maps a subsidiary segment parent value into a segment value in parent ledger to
consolidate balances from the summary account associated with the subsidiary segment
parent value. This rollup rule can only be used with the Balances consolidation method.
• Transfer Level—Summary
• Using—Parent Ranges
• Results—Maps one or more ranges of subsidiary segment parent values into a segment
value in parent ledger. This consolidates balances from the summary accounts associated
with the subsidiary segment parent values. This rollup rule can only be used with the
balances consolidation method.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Defining a Consolidation Mapping Set

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la a Consolidation
Defining
M n-t r Mapping Set
o
(N)nConsolidation > Define > Mapping Set
Mapping Sets are create to transfer data for multiple subsidiaries simultaneously. After the
Mapping Set is created the results can be viewed in the Consolidation Hierarchy Viewer.
Consolidations

EMAK
Consolidation Hierarchy Viewer

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ranHierarchy
Consolidation
M n-t Viewer
o
(N)nConsolidation > Workbench (B) State Controller (B) Mapping Set
(B) View Consolidation Hierarchy
The Consolidation Hierarchy Viewer displays your consolidation structure in a graphical
format. You can easily access your consolidation structure, mapping, parent/subsidiary
relationship, and ledger information, even for complex, multilevel consolidations that include
intermediary parents.
You launch the Consolidation Hierarchy Viewer from the Consolidation Mapping Set window
to display your multilevel consolidation structure in a graphical format. You can expand or
collapse the hierarchy
There are three ways you can review consolidation hierarchies:
• Ledger Only: Displays your hierarchy using only the company's ledger name plus the
three components that make up that ledger: the currency, calendar, and chart of accounts
structure.
• Sets and Mappings Only: Displays your hierarchy using only the consolidation mapping
rules name that comprises the mapping set.
Consolidations

EMAK
• Both: Displays your hierarchy using both the company's ledger name and components and
the mapping rules name.
Note: You can only view consolidation hierarchies for consolidations in a mapping set.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Preparing Subsidiary Data

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Subsidiary
Preparing
M n-t r Data
no your subsidiary data by revaluing and translating balances before you transfer the
Prepare
balances to your parent.
Revalue Balances:
• If any of your ledgers have balance sheet accounts that have foreign currency balances,
revalue the balances to reflect the impact of any changes in exchange rates. Post the
resulting revaluation journal.
Translate Balances:
• Select the State Controller's Translation Status button to check the current status of your
subsidiary translations. If any of your subsidiary ledgers uses a functional currency
different from your parent, you should translate the account balances before you transfer
the subsidiary data to your parent ledger.
Note: Translation must be run in the subsidiary ledger the first time. Subsequent runs can be
done from the Translation Status window.
Consolidations

EMAK
Run Reports:
• Run a trial balance report for each subsidiary ledger, using the parent ledger' functional
currency.
- Run after revaluation and translation have been processed in the consolidation
currency.
- Review the trial balance to ensure the data is accurate.

- Use these reports to reconcile subsidiaries to the parent.
- If subsidiary data has been translated, review the trial balance to ensure the data is
accurate.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Revaluation Process
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la raProcess
Revaluation
M n-t
no should be completed before translation so the values are correct before they are
Revaluation
translated. The revaluation process performs the following:
• Locates all accounts (within a range of specified accounts) in which all or a portion of the
balance is derived from foreign currency transactions.
• Revalues the foreign currency portion of the account balance using the revaluation rate
defined in the Period Rates table. The Revaluation Rate is the inverse of the Period End
Rate (expressed as 1/Period End Rate).
• Calculates the difference between the current cumulative functional currency balance of
these foreign transactions and the revalued functional currency balance calculated using
the Revaluation Rate.
• Creates an unposted journal batch to adjust the account balance to the new revalued
balance. The offset account is the Unrealized Gain/Loss account specified when you run
the revaluation process.
You must post the revaluation journal entries. Optionally, at the beginning of the next period,
you can reverse the journal entries and revalue the balances again at the end of the next period.
Consolidations

EMAK
Notes: Some companies do not reverse the revaluation journal and choose to only revalue the
activity for the period. Also, revaluation is run each period until the obligation is settled. The
Realized Gain/Loss is recorded by the appropriate subledger (Accounts Payable or Accounts
Receivable) at the time the obligation is settled.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Translation
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
Translation
M n-t
nosubsidiary's ledger uses a functional currency different from the currency of the parent
If any
ledger, translate the account balances to the parent's functional currency before transferring
them to the parent ledger.
The first time translation is run for a period, it should be initiated from the subsidiary.
However, subsequent translations, if they are needed, can be initiated from the parent, using
the State Controller Translate button.
Notes:
• When running consolidation for the first time, it is best to consolidate Year-to-Date (YTD)
amounts for balance sheet accounts to capture the subsidiary book's beginning balances.
Period-to-Date (PTD) consolidation lacks the historical information needed to distinguish
the translated beginning balances from the translation adjustment for the new rate.
• For income statement account balances, run period-to-date (PTD) consolidation.
If the period rate changes, or additional data is posted to a subsidiary after translation has been
run, the translation becomes obsolete. This is indicated by the red color of the Translation
button. You need to retranslate the data, delete the previous transfer, then run the transfer
again.
Consolidations

EMAK
Transferring Subsidiary Data to Parent Ledger

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la raSubsidiary
Transferring
M n-t Data to Parent Ledger
o
(N)nConsolidation > Workbench
To transfer consolidation data to your parent ledger, use the Transfer button on the State
Controller to launch a concurrent process.
You can optionally select the following Run Options:
• Run Journal Import: Automatically creates journal entries in your parent ledger.
• Create Summary Journals: Summarizes all journals lines for the same account into a single
debit line and credit line.
• Audit Mode: Creates an audit trail of transferred data that can be reviewed in
Consolidation Audit Report, Unmapped Subsidiary Account Report, and the Disabled
Parent Accounts Report.
Consolidating Balances
• The mapping selected for consolidation must use the balances consolidation method in
order to transfer balance data. When you submit the transfer process with the Run Journal
Import option enabled, General Ledger creates an unposted consolidation journal batch in
your parent ledger that includes all the valid accounts with the range selected for the
Consolidations

EMAK
transfer. If your consolidation range excludes some accounts from your subsidiary ledger,
and consolidation is run in audit mode, you can review any excluded accounts in the
Unmapped Subsidiary Accounts Report.
• If you do not select the Run Journal Import option for your transfer, you must manually
import the journal using the Import Journals window from your parent ledger.
Note: When running consolidation for the first time, you need to run a year-to-date (YTD)
consolidation for balance sheet accounts. This allows you to consolidate the subsidiary's
beginning balances. For each subsequent consolidation, run consolidation using PTD
balances to get the net change for the period.
Consolidating Transactions
• You can consolidate transactions only if the mapping you want to transfer uses the
transactions consolidation method. In addition, you must use the Balance Type of Actual.
For average balance processing books, you should consolidate into a non-consolidations
ledger with average balances enabled.
s
• In the Consolidation Workbench, select the consolidation mapping you want to run. a
h
) ฺa
General Ledger automatically enters Actual for the Balance Type, Standard for the Usage
o m
o o ฺc uide
type, and PTD for the Amount Type. Then select the journal batches you want to
consolidate. You can search subsidiary ledgers for all unconsolidated journal batches,
previously consolidated batches or both. y ah ent G
Transferring Consolidation Set Data
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
• If you have numerous subsidiaries, you can group them into a consolidation mapping set
e rg use
and then transfer the set to the parent ledger. You can use the Query Mappings button to
g
l a k_ e to
review the mappings contained in a specific mapping set, the subsidiary period and date.
a ns
Select the mappings you want to transfer by selecting the check box to the left of each
( m c e
r g es le li
mapping name. Then select the Transfer button to launch the transfer program.
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Consolidation Tracking and Reversals

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a s
la ranTracking
Consolidation
M n-t and Reversals
o
(N)nConsolidation > Workbench (B) Find
Consolidation Tracking: The Transferred Balances column on the Consolidation Workbench
indicates whether the balances for a mapping are current or obsolete. The workbench monitors
subsidiary account balances for any changes that occur after the subsidiary data has been
transferred to the parent ledger.
Consolidation Reversals: If you reverse a subsidiary consolidation process, the Status column
displays Reversed for that process if all the following conditions have been met:
• The original consolidation journal is posted.
• A reversal of the original consolidation journal is generated and posted.
• The order of the operations is not important. A reversal can be performed before posting
the original consolidation journal, but all three operations must all be complete for a status
display of Reversed.
Note: If you need to rerun consolidation or re-transfer data from your subsidiaries, be sure to
reverse the original consolidation journal entries to avoid double-counting balances.
Consolidations

EMAK
Posting Consolidation Journal Entries

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Consolidation
Posting
M n-t r Journal Entries
noyou have transferred subsidiary data to the parent ledger:
After
• Run Journal Import, if not chosen as a consolidation run option.
• Review the unposted consolidation.
• Post the consolidation journal entries in the parent ledger. This launches a concurrent
process.
• Request standard or FSG reports to review the consolidated results.
Consolidations

EMAK
Global Consolidation System Cross Instance Data Transfer

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laConsolidation
Global
M n-t r System Cross Instance Data Transfer
no that manage their business operations in multiple database instances need an
Enterprises
automated way to transfer data from remote subsidiary database instances to a central
consolidation database instance.
The Global Consolidation System Cross Instance Data Transfer features the following:
• Automatic transfer of consolidation data from one instance to another using database links
• Import and post consolidation journals in one step
• Notify users of the transfer status using Workflow Notifications
The Global Consolidation System facilitates the consolidation of data from remote subsidiary
ledger database instances to a central consolidation database instance. Using database links,
Global Consolidation System allows you to automatically transfer consolidation data from one
instance to another, as well as optionally import and post the data automatically in the
consolidation database instance. You no longer have to manually transfer consolidation data
files from the remote subsidiary instances to the consolidation database instance and manually
import and post the data into the parent ledger.
This feature automates the entire process and also includes workflow notifications providing
notification of the cross instance consolidation status. Global companies with operations on
Consolidations

EMAK
multiple database instances can use this feature to consolidate their subsidiaries in a more
efficient and automated manner.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Cross Instance Data Transfer Security

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laInstance
a n s
Cross
M n-t r Data Transfer Security
no companies with operations on multiple database instances require security of database
Global
objects from unauthorized users to do the following:
• Prevent users from modifying tables and other objects in the parent consolidation instance
• Limit users to only transferring, importing, and posting consolidation data
Using this security, there is no need to re-enter your username and password every time you
transfer consolidation data, saving time and redundancy. And, the username/password is now
validated at the time you sign on to Oracle Applications.
Consolidations

EMAK
Global Consolidation System Parallel Consolidation

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
laConsolidation
Global
M n-t r System Parallel Consolidation
no companies who transfer data for a large number of subsidiaries want to:
Global
• Improve the performance of consolidation transfers from different subsidiaries
• Speed the close process by running consolidation transfers in parallel
Global Consolidation System Parallel Consolidation allows users to run multiple concurrent
consolidation transfer processes in parallel for different subsidiaries and to consolidate a high
volume of detail. The Global Consolidation System Parallel Consolidation feature takes
advantage of using separate GL_INTERFACE tables to speed up the transfer and import of
consolidation data into the target ledgers using multiple parallel processes. This allows global
companies, who often need to transfer data for a large number of subsidiaries, to increase
processing efficiency and save time during the critical close process.
To use Global Consolidation System Parallel Consolidation, you must select the Run Journal
Import option in the Transfer Consolidation Data or Transfer Consolidation Data Set forms.
Consolidations

EMAK
Creating Eliminating Entries

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Eliminating
Creating
M n-t r Entries
noare several methods you can use to create eliminating entries in your consolidated parent
There
or elimination ledger.
Use the Automatic Intercompany Eliminations to create elimination sets. Elimination sets are
used for fully reciprocating eliminations. For example, use elimination sets to fully offset each
subsidiary's Intercompany Payables and Intercompany Receivables accounts.
Other options for eliminating entries are to use Oracle General Ledger's journaling features to
do the following:
• Create recurring journal entries for eliminations that are not fully reciprocated. Recurring
journals allow you to create formula-based eliminations that only partially offset
intercompany transactions, such as minority interest eliminations.
• Create standard journal entries to eliminate intercompany balances.
• Create elimination journal entries in Web ADI. Use the power of Excel to enter
elimination entries, link worksheets and create complex calculations. You can upload
them from Web ADI, then post them in Oracle General Ledger.
Note: If you want to segregate elimination entries from operational accounting entries, you
should create a single elimination company. For example, if you have Company 01, 02, and 03,
Consolidations

EMAK
create a fourth elimination company, such as Company 99. Enter all eliminating entries using
the elimination company. Then you can report consolidated results before and after
eliminations.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Formula-Based Eliminations
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ransEliminations
Formula-Based
M n-t
no journals must be used to eliminate average daily balances. For more information,
Recurring
refer to the Oracle General Ledger User Guide or the 11i General Ledger Financial
Management Advanced Topic Average Balance Processing.
Consolidations

EMAK
Automatic Intercompany Eliminations Program

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Intercompany
Automatic
M n-t r Eliminations Program
o
ThenAutomatic Intercompany Eliminations program eliminates intercompany balances. It is
used only for fully reciprocating eliminations that repeat every accounting period.
To use this program create an elimination set. An elimination set is a batch of one or more
related elimination entries. If an elimination company is used as the target company when
booking elimination entries, you must specify the balancing segment value for the elimination
company.
The Automatic Intercompany Eliminations program automatically generates eliminating
entries per the rules specified in the Define Elimination Accounts window.
• An elimination set is defined with a source account to eliminate, and a target account to
eliminate it into.
• When the elimination is run, journal entries are created for all values in the source account
to zero them out and post them to the target account.
• You can use the Consolidation Workbench and State Controller to track the elimination
status of elimination sets and post any generated elimination sets.
Consolidations

EMAK
Defining an Elimination Set

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la anrElimination
Defining
M n-t Set
no sets can contain a single eliminating journal entry, or a group of related
Elimination
elimination entries.
Elimination entries are comprised of individual lines mapped to fully eliminate balances from
source accounts to target accounts.
Note: You cannot use the Automatic Intercompany Eliminations program to eliminate average
balances.
Elimination Set Components
• Elimination Company:
- Choose a balancing segment value to represent the elimination company. This
company is used as the target company when booking elimination entries and the
value cannot be overridden. You can leave this field blank if you do not wish to use
an elimination company. If you leave this field blank, the balancing segment value of
the target account is used.
Consolidations

EMAK
• Track Elimination Sets:

- If you want the elimination set to be part of the checklist for determining which
eliminations are completed for the period, select the Track Elimination Status check
box.
• Period Last Run:
- General Ledger populates this field to indicate the period in which you last executed
an elimination set.
• Effective From and To dates:
- Enter a range of effective dates that includes only those periods for which you want
the eliminating entry to be used. Oracle General Ledger generates eliminating journal
entries only when you choose a date that falls within the Effective Dates range.
• Currency:
- Select the functional currency of the parent ledger or STAT. The currency you
specify is for both source and target accounts.
s a
• Amount Type: h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
- Enter period-to-date, (PTD), quarter-to-date (QTD), year-to-date (YTD), or project-
to-date (PJTD). Average Balances cannot be used.
• Source Account: y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
- The Source Account balance is fully eliminated into the target account. The
e s 2 this
elimination program takes the negative balance of the source account and places the
e rg use
balance in the target account. For each account segment, choose a detail account
g
l a k_ e to
value, a parent value, or leave the segment blank.
m a ns
Note: Use parent values to reduce account maintenance because the elimination set
( c e
r g es le li
automatically accommodates changes in the child values associated with a particular
k Ge ferab
parent value. Parent values save you time in defining elimination sets because you
can specify one elimination line which includes the parent value, instead of multiple
a la ranslines for each child value. If you use parent values, the elimination functionality
M n-t
no
automatically loops through each of the child values for those segments and creates
its detailed or summarized offset in your elimination journal.
• Target Account:
- Specify a target account for your elimination entry. For each account segment, choose
a detail account value or leave the segment blank.
Note: If you specify an elimination company in the Elimination Sets window, the
balancing segment value for the target account is set for you. You cannot override
this default. If you do not specify an elimination company in the Elimination Sets
window, the source account balancing segment value defaults as the target balancing
segment value and you can override this value.
Specifying an Elimination Company
• If you specify an elimination company in the Elimination Sets window, the balancing
segment value for the target account is set for you. You cannot override this default.
• If you do not specify an elimination company in the Elimination Sets window, the source
account balancing segment value defaults as the target balancing segment value and you
can override this value.
Consolidations

EMAK
Source and Target Account Examples

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laandrTarget
a n s
Source
M n-t Account Examples
o
Thenexamples above illustrate how various mapping rules work based on the account structure
shown above for a single account segment, in this case, the cost center segment. The same
concepts apply to all segments in your chart of accounts.
The parent cost center 999 has three child accounts, 100, 200, and 300. Cost center 400 does
not have a parent.
Consolidations

EMAK
Balancing Options for Eliminations

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Options
a n s
Balancing
M n-t r for Eliminations
no
If elimination journals are out of balance, you can specify balancing options to either allow out
of balance journals to be created or to post the net difference to an alternative account.
Balancing options apply to all journals created for the elimination set.
Allow Out of Balance Journal: Allows the creation of an unbalanced journal entry to be
reviewed and corrected before posting.
Balance with Net Difference Account: Specifies an account template to use if the difference is
a net debit or credit.
In addition, threshold rules can be applied to prevent the automatic balancing of elimination
journals if the net difference exceeds a specific amount, a percentage of a particular account, or
a percentage of the journal.
Enter one of the following parameters to specify the threshold amount:
• Constant amount: Specify a fixed amount
• Percentage of account: Enter a number and an account. The number represents a
percentage of the period-to-date (PTD) balance of the selected account. This account must
be a detail account.
Consolidations

EMAK
• Percentage of journal: Enter a number that represents the percentage of the lesser total
debit or total credit of the unbalanced journal.
If multiple balancing segments are involved, General Ledger creates specific balancing
accounts by balancing segment value.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Allow Out of Balance Journal

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Balance with Net Difference

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la withraNet
n s
Balance
M n-t Difference
nouse the Balance with Net Difference option, you can select different net difference
If you
accounts for debit differences and credit differences.
You can also enter threshold rules with the Balance with Net Difference option:
• If the difference does not exceed the amount specified in the threshold rule, the
elimination journal is automatically balanced.
• If the difference exceeds the amount specified in the threshold rule, you can examine the
difference in the out of balance journal entry and decide what needs to be done.
Consolidations

EMAK
Consolidated Balances Inquiry

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la raBalances
Consolidated
M n-t Inquiry
noGeneral Ledger's drill down functionality, you can view any subsidiary, account, journal,
With
or subledger transaction. From your parent ledger, you can drill between:
• Consolidated and subsidiary entities
• Detail accounts and journal entries
• Summary and detail account balances
• Journals and subledger transactions
Note: To be able to use drill down, select the Import Journal References check box in the
Journal Sources window, in the parent ledger, for the consolidation journal source. To
drilldown to subledger transactions, you must also select the Import Journal References check
box for each subledger source.
Drilldown Example
Suppose while analyzing total consolidated sales in your parent ledger, you want to determine
how much each subsidiary contributed to the total amount. You drill down from the
consolidated sales balance to any subsidiary sales account balance. From there, you can view
account details and journal entries. If you need further information, drill down further to the
Consolidations

EMAK
Accounts Receivable subledger transactions that contributed to your total consolidated sales
balance.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Performing Consolidated Balances Inquiry

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rConsolidated
Performing
M n-t Balances Inquiry
o > Account
(N)nInquiry
Perform an account inquiry in your consolidated parent ledger.
Select the Show Journal Details button to drill down to the Journals window.
Search for journal batches with a journal source of Consolidation to locate your consolidation
journal entries.
Select the Drilldown button to open the Consolidation Drilldown window.
• Select Detail Translated Balances button to view the translated balance amounts.
• To view amounts in original currency entered, select the Entered Balances button.
• To change the amount type to Year-to-Date (YTD), Period-to-Date (PTD), Quarter-to-
Date (QTD), or Project-to-Date (PJTD), select the Switch Amount Type button.
Consolidations

EMAK
Running Consolidation Reports

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Consolidation
Running
M n-t r Reports
nothe Report button on the State Controller to submit standard consolidation reports.
Select
Consolidation Audit Report:
• Use this report to review the mapping of account balances from your subsidiary ledger
into accounts in your parent ledger for a specific consolidation mapping. It reports the
total of all subsidiary account balances that were consolidated into each account in your
parent ledger.
Consolidation Exception Reports
Unmapped Subsidiary Report—Use this report to determine if your consolidation is complete
prior to posting. It reports any subsidiary accounts, included in the account range you specified
for your consolidation transfer, with non-zero balances that were not consolidated into your
parent ledger because the accounts were not mapped.
Disabled Parent Account Report—Use this report to review all disabled accounts in your
parent ledger for which you tried to consolidate balances or transactions.
Consolidation Rules Report—This report prints the segment and account rules defined for a
specific consolidation mapping.
Consolidations

EMAK
Consolidation Journals Report—This report lists subsidiary journal lines and the parent
accounts used for your consolidation. Use this report to review journal batches consolidated
across multiple ledgers. You must run this report from your parent ledger. You can only run
this report if your consolidation uses the Transactions method and you do not select the Create
Summary Journals option.
Notes:
• The Consolidation Audit Report, Unmapped Subsidiary Report, and Disabled Parent
Account Report are available only if you select the audit mode run option when
transferring your subsidiary data.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

EMAK
Creating Custom Consolidation Reports

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Custom
a n s
Creating
M n-t r Consolidation Reports
nocan use Financial Statement Generator (FSG) or Web Applications Desktop Integrator
You
(Web ADI) to define custom consolidation reports for your parent ledger. You can report on
multiple ledgers in the same report as long as each ledger shares the same account structure
and calendar.
Consolidations

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Consolidations

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
ah ent G
Financial Reporting
y
0
Chapter0 0@ Stud
13
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 1

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 2

EMAK
Financial Reporting
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 3

EMAK
Objectives
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 4

EMAK
Objectives (continued)
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 5

EMAK
Reporting Options
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Options
a n s
Reporting
M n-t r
no Function Legend
Reporting
OI - Online Inquiry
Std - Standard Reporting
FSG - Financial Statement Generator
Web ADI - Web Applications Desktop Integrator
EPB - Oracle Enterprise Planning and Budgeting
BIS - Business Intelligence System
Disc - Discoverer
RXi - RXi Report Administration Tool
Additional details about each of the reporting options are available in the following pages.
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 6

EMAK
Online Inquiry
s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laInquiry
a n s
Online
M n-t r
no Applications provide broad online inquiry and analysis capabilities. With Oracle
Oracle
General Ledger, you can use Oracle's inquiry functionality to drill from summary account
balances to detail balances, and to complete journal entries. You can drill to complete views of
any underlying Oracle subledger transactions for further accounting entry analysis, including
transactions from Receivables, Payables, Projects, Assets (except depreciation), Purchasing,
Inventory, and Work in Process.
Drilling Down to Detail Balances
• You can drill down to detail account balances, review journal entries, then drill down
further to your subsidiary ledgers, review subsidiary account balances, then drill down
even further to subsidiary journal entries and even to your subsidiaries' subledger details.
• For example, while analyzing total consolidated sales, you may want to determine how
much each subsidiary contributed to the total amount. Simply drill down from the
consolidated sales balance to any subsidiary sales account balance. From there, you can
view account details and journals. If you still require more information, drill down further
to the subledger transactions that contributed to your total consolidated sales balance.
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 7

EMAK
• During the drill down process, you can view your accounting entries in a T-Account
format or a Summary Activity format. The T-Account format eases accounting analysis by
graphically displaying your accounting entry in T-Accounts for both summary and detail
financial information. The Summary Activity format displays your accounting entries in a
trial balance layout.
• For more information, refer to Oracle General Ledger User Guide or 11i General Ledger
Financial Management Fundamental Topic Journal Entries on Performing Account

Inquiry and Drill Down to Oracle Subledgers.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 8

EMAK
When to Use Online Inquiry

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting
Chapter 13 - Page 9

EMAK
Standard Reports and Listings

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Reports
a n s
Standard
M n-t r and Listings
no General Ledger provides several types of reports and listings to meet your business
Oracle
needs. All of the information in these reports and listings is also available online.
You can obtain account analysis information, budget information, chart of accounts listing, and
many other types of data without customization.
• Run in the background while working online
• Group reports into report sets
• Schedule reports to run at regularly scheduled intervals
• Secure access using segment values
Financial Reporting

EMAK
When to Use Standard Reports

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Financial Statement Generator Features

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Statement
Financial
M n-t r Generator Features
no General Ledger's Financial Statement Generator empowers you to do the following:
Oracle
• Generate financial reports, such as income statements and balance sheets, based upon data
in your general ledger.
• Apply security rules to control what financial information can be printed by specific users
and responsibilities in any reports they run using FSG.
• Define your reports with reusable report objects, making it easy to create new reports from
the components of reports you've already defined.
• Design custom financial reports to meet specific business needs.
• Print as many reports as you need, simultaneously.
• Print the same report for multiple companies, cost centers, departments, or any other
segment of your account structure, in the same report request.
• Schedule reports to run automatically.
• Produce ad hoc reports whenever you need them.
• Print reports to tab-delimited files for easy import into client-based spreadsheet programs.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
You can define custom financial reports, such as income statements and balance sheets, online
headings, descriptions, format, and calculations in addition to the actual content. The reusable
report components make building reports quick and easy. You can copy a report component,
make minor edits, then apply the report component to a new report without having to create a
new report from scratch.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
FSG Hierarchical Security

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
FSGa la rans Security
Hierarchical
M n-t
o the same segment value security rules based on parent hierarchies as those defined
•nUses
for online inquiries and most major general ledger standard reports.
- This allows you to protect sensitive financial information from being viewed in FSG
reports by any responsibility that has security rules assigned.
• Significantly simplifies the definition and maintenance of complex security rules.
- When you add new segment values, you do not have to update the security rules if
that value is assigned to a parent value with security rules already defined.
- If you define a security rule to include or exclude a parent segment value, any FSG
report that you run from the responsibility to which you assigned this rule will include
or exclude data for the parent segment value and its child values accordingly.
- Any additions or changes to your organization rollup structures will be reflected in
both your reporting and security hierarchies simultaneously.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining Row Sets

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Row a n s
Defining
M n-t r Sets
no row set can be used for many different reports. For example, Row Set A above is used
A single
for an Income Statement with current information for Company 1. It can also be used to
produce an Income Statement by Division, such as in the second example above, or for any
other entity (company, group, or cost center), or for the same entity with a yearly comparison
column.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Define Column Sets

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laColumna n s
Define
M n-t r Sets
o
•nColumn sets define the format and content of columns in your financial reports. Column
sets include headings and subheadings, currency assignments, amount types, exception
conditions, and calculation columns for totals.
• You can define columns one by one as you do for row sets, or you can build a column set
graphically.
• When you define a column set, you indicate which Oracle General Ledger balance type
you want to include in the column.
• Although you normally assign accounts to your rows, you can also assign an individual
account combination or range of account combinations to each column.
• You can define calculations to perform a variety of complex computations in your report
• The calculations can reference other columns in the report.
• You can define a new column set, copy information from an existing column set, or use
one of the standard column sets provided by Oracle General Ledger.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
When to Use FSG Reports

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Using Ledger Sets in FSG Reports

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laLedger a n s
Using
M n-t r Sets in FSG Reports
noachieve processing efficiencies, such as opening periods for multiple ledgers or
To
summarizing balances across ledgers using FSGs, you can group multiple ledgers into a
ledger set. All ledgers in a ledger set must share the same chart of accounts and accounting
calendar/period type combination. This includes reporting currencies at the Journal and
Subledger levels that you may want to combine with the primary ledger to allow you to
synchronize accounting periods or view data across ledgers.
The same ledger can belong to multiple ledger sets, and ledger sets can contain other ledger
sets.
Note: When you define a ledger set, you must specify a default ledger for Financial
Statement Generator (FSG).
You can define FSG reports to be reusable for different ledger sets by specifying the ledger
set at report generation time as opposed to in the report definition.
Display Types
The display type controls the level of detail FSG will show on your report for individual
report lines.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
• Expand: If you choose Expand for the ledger segment and the ledger segment value is a
ledger set, the FSG report displays individual rows for the ledgers of the ledger set and
shows the ledger short names. The ledgers are listed in order of their ledger short name.
• Total: This display type controls the level of detail FSG will show on your report for
individual report lines. If you choose Total for the ledger segment and the ledger segment
value is a ledger set, the FSG report totals the ledgers in the ledger set and displays rows
for the totals without displaying the individual ledgers.

• Both: If you choose Both, your report will include both the expanded detail and the total.
If you choose Both for the ledger segment and the ledger segment is a ledger set or ledger,
the FSG report displays both the expanded detail and total rows for the ledger and ledger
set.
Note: You must use a display type of T (Total) for each segment if you assign a
ledger/ledger set or accounts to a column.
Note: FSG does not support expanding across a ledger set within a single column. If you
s a
want to report on a ledger set across columns, you must explicitly specify the ledger or
reporting currency to report on in each column. h
) ฺa
o m
Assigning Accounts
o o ฺc uide
ah ent G
You assign accounts by entering one or more account ranges. Optionally, enter a ledger set in
y
the ledger segment of the account assignments. You can also provide the ledger segment
value at runtime.
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
XML Publisher and Templates

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la ranand s
XML Publisher
M n-t Templates
no Publisher Basic Report Template
XML
General Ledger provides a basic report template, FSG: Basic Template, for you to use for
your FSG reports. You may use the formatting provided in this report template for your
FSG reports or you can modify the template and save it as a new template or create a
completely new one. The FSG: Basic Template is formatted for a dynamic number of
columns, since the number of columns will vary for every FSG report.
Note: The FSG: Basic Template uses the Arial font. If your FSG reports use the Arial font
and they use row orders or the display types of Expand or Both, the row descriptions may
be misaligned. To avoid misalignment, create a template that uses a fixed width font, such
as Courier.
XML Output Files
XML output files are composed of elements. Each tag set is an element. When a report
template is designed, you define placeholders for the elements. The placeholder maps the data
field to an element in the XML output file.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Publishing FSG Reports with XML Publisher

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rFSGa n s
M n-t Reports with XML Publisher
Publishing
nopublish a FSG report, perform the following high-level steps:
To
1. If you do not use an existing RTF template, design your rich text format (RTF) report
template in your word processing application. A basic report template is
provided for you to use or modify as a new report template.
2. For new report templates, register the template using the XML Publisher Administrator
responsibility so the designed layout can be applied to a FSG report.
3. Define your FSG report. You can select the XML output option as the default or you can
select it when you generate the FSG report.
4. Generate your FSG report using the XML output option.
5. Use XML Publisher to publish your FSG report using the formatting of your report
template to feed the XML output into XML Publisher.
Note: Alternatively, publish your FSG report with a single submission request that generates
your XML output and publishes your FSG report from one request.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Options for Publishing Your FSG Reports

To generate financial reports with XML Publisher, you have several options for publishing
your FSG report:
• Publish your FSG report with XML Publisher in one step. This automatically creates your
FSG report in XML output and uses that output to publish your FSG report from a single
submission request. You do this through the Submit Requests window.

• Generate your FSG XML output from the Run Financial Reports window or from the
Submit Requests window. Then separately run the XML Publisher program from the
Submit Requests window against that request to apply the layout and formatting of a
report template to your FSG report.
• After the XML output of your FSG report has been generated the first time, you can
republish the FSG report against a different report template to obtain a different report
layout and format without having to run the FSG program again.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
When To Use Report Manager

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laTo Usea n s
When
M n-t r Report Manager
noOracle Report Manager when you need to:
Use
• Provide a centralized report distribution system for point-in-time reports.
• Submit and publish Financial Statement Generator (FSG), Ad Hoc FSG, Variable Format,
and Standard reports to a central repository.
• Present reports in the repository to information consumers via menu items on the Oracle
E-Business Suite Home page or portal.
• Approve reports before making them available for general viewing.
• Permit report availability in a future timeframe.
• View spreadsheets or PDF files for further analysis.
• Secure reports by utilizing three security paradigms: User to Value, custom, and flexfield
segment.
• Archive reports for future reference that no longer need to be displayed to report
consumers.
• Publish reports that have been submitted as part of request sets or report sets.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
• Upload any type of file and publish it to a central repository. Reports in the repository can
then distributed to the Oracle E-Business Suite home page.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
E-Business Intelligence
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la rIntelligence
E-Business
M n-t
o Business Intelligence System (BIS) is an executive information system which
ThenOracle
provides a framework for corporate performance management and continuous process
improvement. By delivering timely and accurate information, BIS enables managers to make
better decisions, faster. Oracle Business Intelligence System is part of the Oracle eBusiness
Suite, an integrated suite of e-business applications for the enterprise, which is designed to
transform your business into an e-business.
Oracle Business Intelligence System can analyze the back office and front office data provided
by the Oracle eBusiness Suite. This includes ERP applications such as Financials, Human
Resources, Purchasing, Operations, and Manufacturing, and CRM applications supporting
Sales, Service, Customer, Marketing, and Interaction Center (Call Center). Users can set
targets to meet their strategic objectives, monitor performance in all areas of the company,
receive notifications when performance is out of tolerance, and respond immediately by taking
corrective actions.
One of the many components in the BIS system are the reports, performance measures, and
workbooks delivered by Oracle General Ledger.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
These BIS components are integrated with an alert and workflow mechanism to proactively
communicate operational performance to the management team. Management can then drill
from high level financial information into more detail level data based on the dimensions they
choose; including ledgers, operating units, cost centers, and product groups.
General Ledger provides the following seven informative reports in BIS:
1. Revenues Report
2. Expenses Report
3. Profit Margin Report
4. Contribution Margin Report
5. Current Ratio Report
6. Earnings Per Share (EPS) Report
7. Summary Analyst Report
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
When to Use E-Business Intelligence

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Oracle Discoverer
s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laDiscoverer
a n s
Oracle
M n-t r
no Discoverer is an intuitive ad-hoc query, reporting, analysis, and Web-publishing tool
Oracle
that empowers business users at all levels of the organization to gain access to information
from data marts, data warehouses, and online transaction processing systems.
Report builders and analysts can create, modify, and execute ad hoc queries and reports. More
casual users can view and navigate through pre-defined reports and graphs. Discoverer
provides a business view to hide the complexity of the underlying data structure. It enables
users to focus on solving business problems instead of data access issues.
Discoverer Key Characteristics
• Works on Oracle 8i and 9i
• Built-in structure for BIS
• Can include operations data
• Security rules already defined apply
• Non multi-dimensional table - uses rows and columns
Financial Reporting

EMAK
When to Use Oracle Discoverer

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Preparing Your FSG Report

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Youra n s
Preparing r
M n-t FSG Report
no you define a report in Oracle General Ledger, draft your report on paper. Sketching the
Before
report in advance helps you plan the format and content of the report and saves you time later.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Building Basic Reports

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Basica n s
Building
M n-t r Reports
noreports consist of a few headings to describe the information in the report, followed by
Basic
the report data, which is often presented in tabular form as a series of intersecting rows and
columns. Basic reports are two dimensional, similar to what you might create in a spreadsheet.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Financial Statement Generator

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Statement
a n s
Financial
M n-t r Generator
Younocan define custom financial reports, such as income statements and balance sheets, online
headings, descriptions, format, and calculations in addition to the actual content. The reusable
report components make building reports quick and easy. You can copy a report component
from one report, make minor edits, then apply the report component to a new report without
having to create a new report from scratch.
Row Set
• A required report component that defines the rows of your report. Typically, accounts are
assigned to row set definitions. For each row, you control the format and content,
including line descriptions, indentations, spacing, page breaks, calculations, units of
measure, and precision.
Column Set
• The second required report component that defines the columns of your report. Typically,
amount types are assigned to column set definitions. You control the format and content of
each column.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Report
• You build a report by defining then combining up to five reusable report components. At a
minimum, you must have a row set and column set for every report. Before you define a
report using the Financial Statement Generator (FSG), draft your report on paper.
Sketching the report in advance helps you plan the format and content of the report and
saves you time later.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Steps for FSG Financial Reports

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a lafor FSGa n s
Steps
M n-t r Financial Reports
o require a row set and a column set. There are three other optional report
Allnreports
components that are used to apply special formatting to your reports. For example, you can
hide specific rows, rearrange the sort order of your rows, display the account value and/or
description, or print reports by any accounting flexfield segment, such as department, on
separate pages.
Report Sets
• A report set is a group of FSG reports. Typically, report sets are used to group reports you
run together frequently. For example, you can create a month-end report set that includes a
balance sheet, an income statement by department, an income statement by company, and
a budget vs. actual income statement in a single submission without having to run each
report separately.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining Row Sets

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Row a n s
Defining
M n-t r Sets
•nAo single row set can be used for many different reports. For example, Row Set A above is
used for an Income Statement with current information. It can also be used to produce an
Income Statement for any other entity (company, division, group, or cost center), or for
the same entity with a yearly comparison column.
• A Row Set defines the format and content of the rows in an FSG report. In FSG, the
commonly assumed attribute for a row definition is an account assignment, whereas the
attribute for a column definition is a time period or amount type. When you define a row
set, you can:
Assign accounts:
• To indicate which general ledger account balances you want to include in the row. You
can assign an individual account, parent account, or range of accounts to each row.
Define calculations:
• To perform a variety of complex computations in your report. The calculations can refer to
any previous rows in a report, including rows you choose not to display.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Specify formatting:
• To control page breaks, indentation, line spacing, and underline characters. You can define
a new row set, or use FSG's AutoCopy feature to copy an existing row set, which you can
then modify as needed.
Note: If you have average balance processing enabled in your ledger, you can report on
functional, foreign, and translated average balances.

Implementation Note
Row Set:
• When creating a balance sheet, you must include your entire income statement account
range for the Current Period Retained Earnings amount. Oracle General Ledger never
posts the monthly net income amount to an actual current period retained earnings
account. This only happens when the first period of a new fiscal year is opened. Thus, to
achieve the figure for current period retained earnings, it is a reporting solution where you
enter your Profit and Loss account range in the account assignment.
s a
h
) ฺa
• When creating reports, it is a good idea to include check figures at the end of the report to
m
verify that all accounts were properly assigned in the reports. This is particularly useful if
o
o o ฺc uide
you have had to enter account ranges with gaps because of the structure of your chart of
accounts.
y ah ent G
defined as follows: 0 0 0@ Stud
• For example, when creating a Balance Sheet, add check figures at the end of the report
e s 2 this
- Total Assets 1000-1999
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
- Total Liabilities 2000-2999
a ns
- Total Stockholder's Equity 3000-9999.
( m c e
r g es le li
Note: To derive the net income amount that is usually posted to current period retained
Ge ferab
earnings, you must include your income statement account range.
k
Assigning Line Numbers to Rows:
la rans
a
M n-t
• You should enter line numbers in increments of 10 to allow for space to add additional
no rows for future modifications.
Account Assignment Display Option:
• Oracle General Ledger stores debit balances as positive numbers and credit balances as
negative numbers. If you want your credit balance accounts, such as liabilities, and
revenues to display as positive numbers, select the Change Sign check box. Doing so will
have no effect on your calculations.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Assigning Accounts
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Accounts
a n s
Assigning
M n-t r
nothe Account Assignments button to assign accounts for a row set.
Select
Select a numeric operator (+ or -) to add or subtract the totals for the account range.
Enter a Low and High for the range of account combinations. To specify an individual account,
enter the same account as the Low and High. You can leave these fields blank to create generic
row sets with universal account assignments.
Enter a Display type for each account segment:
• Select "E" to expand the range and display one report line for each segment value.
• Select "T" to total the amounts in the range and display only one total line for the segment
values.
• Select "T" for each segment of the range if multiple account ranges are assigned to a row.
• Select "B" to display both the expanded detail and the Total. "B" combines the effects of
"E" and "T".
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Implementation Note
Account Assignment:
• You should always enter a unique Row Name for every row. The Row Name does not
appear in any reports, but it does appear in lists of values when you perform calculations.
If the row is simply a label, for example, "Current Assets", that does not have any
accounts assigned to it, you should append the row name with the word "label" to let you
know that this row contains no accounts and you will not need to include it in your
calculations. Also be sure the row name is unique to ensure that calculations yield the
correct results. If you use the same row name for two different rows, FSG will not know
which row to use.
• Consider creating generic row sets by applying "T" display types for each account
segment. You can later define content sets to create more specific reports.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining Calculations in Row Sets

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Calculations
Defining
M n-t r in Row Sets
no - The midpoint or the middle value.
Median
Average - The value obtained by dividing the sum total by the number.
Standard Deviation - A value obtained by dividing by one less than the number of squares in
the sum of squares.
Absolute Value - Debit and credit values are both displayed as positive numbers.
Note: Because Balance Control and Display Options are usually defined for columns, they are
covered in the Defining Column Sets section. However, they may also be defined for rows.
Implementation Note
Row Set Calculations:
• Oracle General Ledger stores credit balances as negative numbers and debit balances as
positive numbers. For example, revenue accounts are stored as negative numbers and
expense accounts are stored as positive numbers. Therefore, you should define your
calculations accordingly. For example, to create a row called Gross Margin that calculates
revenues minus costs, you should add (not subtract) your costs row to your revenue row.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Reviewing Your Row Set Definitions

s a
a
)h ฺ
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Youra n s
Reviewing r
M n-t Row Set Definitions
o difference between these two reports is that the FSG - Row Set Summary Listing
Thenmain
summarizes all row sets while the FSG - Row Set Detail Listing details only one row set.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining Ad Hoc Reports

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la AdraHocn s
Defining
M n-t Reports
Ton o ad hoc reports, you select report objects and other report parameters during the report
run
submission process. With predefined report, you can run the report with the parameters you
saved in the report definition or you can change the parameters at runtime.
Note: If you change the parameters at runtime, FSG will not save them in the stored report
definition.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining Column Sets

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Column
a n s
Defining
M n-t r Sets
o
•nColumn sets define the format and content of columns in your financial reports. Column
sets include headings and subheadings, currency assignments, amount types, exception
conditions, and calculation columns for totals.
• You can define columns one by one as you do for row sets, or you can build a column set
graphically.
• When you define a column set, you indicate which Oracle General Ledger balance type
you want to include in the column.
• Although you normally assign accounts to your rows, you can also assign an individual
account combination or range of account combinations to each column.
• You can define calculations to perform a variety of complex computations in your report.
• The calculations can reference other columns in the report.
• You can define a new column set, copy information from an existing column set, or use
one of the standard column sets provided by Oracle General Ledger.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Implementation Note
Column Sets:
• When using the Quarter-To-Date (QTD) Amount Type in column sets to perform
quarterly reporting, you will need to create four different column sets if you are using a
non-standard calendar, such as a 13 period calendar because 13 does not divide evenly
into 4 and the period offsets will not give the desired results.
Column Set Amount Types:
• When creating column sets that will be coupled with Balance Sheet Row Sets, be sure to
use the Year-to-Date (YTD) amount type. Oracle General Ledger does not store YTD
balances. Thus, in order to achieve a cumulative total on balance sheet accounts, you must
have FSG calculate the amount for you using the YTD amount type.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Applying Column Set Relative Headings

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Column
a n s
Applying
M n-t r Set Relative Headings
no
&POI:
• Enter &POI, followed by a number from -999 to +999 that refers to the relative period
offset of your column.
- For example, enter &POI0 to display amounts for the period you specify at run time,
enter &POI-1 to display amounts one period before the period you specify at run
time.
&BUDGET:
• Enter &BUDGET, followed by a control value number to print the budget name assigned
to the control value number when you define or run your report.
&DOI:
• Date of interest, the date for which you want to run the report.
&ENCUMBRANCE:
• Enter &ENCUMBRANCE, followed by a control value number to print the encumbrance
type assigned to the control value number when you define your report.
&CURRENCY:
Financial Reporting

EMAK
• Enter &CURRENCY, followed by a control value number to print the currency assigned
to the control value number when you define or run your report column.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Standard Column Sets

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Column
a n s
Standard
M n-t r Sets
o
•nColumns containing actual amounts for multiple consecutive periods (trend reports)
• Actual, budget, and variance columns (control reports)
The generic column sets can be used for the following reports:
Income Statements
• Functional: Breaks out expenses by functional area
• Natural Account: Lists expenses by account or groups of related accounts
Balance Sheets
• Detail balance sheet accounts
• Summary balance sheet accounts
Other Reports
• Statement of changes to financial position
• Daily activity reports
You can define these reports at whatever level of detail is appropriate for your business.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Reviewing Your Column Set Definitions

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Row Set and Column Overrides

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la andraColumn
Row Set
M n-t Overrides
noOverrides Column
Row
• Amount Type
• Period Offset
• Control Value (Must assign same currency or budget type at row and column level)
• Format Mask
• Factor
• Display Zero
• Level of Detail
Column Overrides Row
• Override Row/Column Calculations (Conflict exists only if the same value (Yes or No) is
entered at both the row and the column set levels)
• Activity
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Other Conflicts
• Accounts: Report uses intersecting accounts.
• Summary: Must assign the same summary option at the row and column level.
• Currency: Must assign the same currency at the row and column level.
• Change Sign: Yes overrides No.
• Change Sign on Variance: Yes overrides No.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining and Requesting Financial Reports

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la andraRequesting
Defining
M n-t Financial Reports
o you define a report, you can save it and use it whenever you run a financial report or
•nOnce
define a report set.
• You can copy a financial report you have already defined and modify the new report as
necessary.
• You can also define ad hoc financial reports as necessary to meet special reporting needs.
Caution: If the same Row Set is used in ten different reports and you later modify the Row Set,
the ten reports will be affected.
Implementation Note
Ad Hoc Reports:
• All ad hoc reports are saved by FSG to be rerun in the future. You can delete each report
individually in the Define Financial Report window or you can delete all of them at once
by running the Program Delete Ad Hoc Reports from the Submit Requests window.
Running Reports:
• If your FSG reports are not producing output or you are having trouble getting a
complicated report definition to work correctly, you should view the log file for the
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Financial Statement Generator in the Requests window. If the error message in the log file
is not detailed enough, change the user profile option FSG: Message Detail to full.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Handling Rounding Problems

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Specifying Control Values

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rControl
a n s
Specifying
M n-t Values
nocan report on budgets, encumbrance types, and other currencies by using control values.
You
Control values are numbers that you specify in the Control Value field, of the Balance Control
options region, on row sets and column sets. When you define a financial report applying the
row set or column set containing a control value, you must specify what the control value or
number represents in the Define Financial Report window. There is a Control Value button
located on the Define Financial Report window which opens the Control Values window. Here,
you specify a number and a budget name, encumbrance type, and/or currency. For currencies,
you can specify entered currencies or balance level reporting currencies.
Note: You must run translation before you use the balance level reporting currency type.
For example, if you define a column set and specify a control value of "1", you refer to the
same number in the report definition and assign either a budget name, encumbrance type, or
currency to associate with the control value.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Notes:
• You must assign the same budget, encumbrance type, or currency to intersecting row and
column control values.
• You cannot enter currencies in the report definition if the report does not contain a row
and/or column set with a currency control value.
• You must specify a budget or encumbrance when your report includes rows or columns
which use related amount types, such as PTD-Budget or PTD-Encumbrance.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining Content Sets

s a
) ฺh a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Content
a n s
Defining
M n-t r Sets
nothough content sets are optional, they are the most powerful component of all FSG
Even
components.
By assigning a content set to a report request, you can generate hundreds of similar reports in a
single run. The content set controls how the numerous reports differ from each other. For
example, you can define a departmental content set which prints a separate report for each
department or you can apply a content set to an expand row set to print a total report.
Content sets work by overriding the row set definition of an existing report and replacing the
row set account assignments and/or display options.
Content sets can be saved as part of a report definition, or can be added dynamically at the time
you request an FSG report.
Hint: Consider using content sets exclusively to control the specific output for each report.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Selecting Display Options

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Display
a n s
Selecting
M n-t r Options
Younocan enter a display option for each account segment range to designate how you want to
display information in a report and whether to print single or multiple reports.
RE - Row/Expand:
• Select RE to expand the range and display a separate line for each segment value in the
range. If you are using parent values, enter the same value as the high and low. Oracle
General Ledger displays only the children (or grandchildren). This is the same as selecting
Expand for row sets.
RT - Row/Total:
• Select RT to total the amounts in the range and display only one line as the Total line. This
is the same as selecting Total for row sets.
RB - Row/Both:
• Select RB to expand and total the range. RB will display a separate line for each segment
value and display a total for all the segment values. This is the same as selecting Both
when defining row sets.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
CT - Column/Total:
• Select CT to total the range and display only the total for the segment values. This has no
effect on the report display.
PE - Page Expand Report:
• Select PE to expand the range and create a separate report for each segment value in the
range. If you are using parent values, enter the same value as the high and low. Oracle
General Ledger displays only the children (or grandchildren).
PT - Report/Total:
• Select PT to total the segment value range and display the total on one page.
• N - No override: Select to use display options entered in the row set definition.
Implementation Note
Display Options:
• Page Expand (PE) Report is the most commonly used display option. It allows you to
perform consolidation within FSG. s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Reviewing Your Content Set Definitions

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining Row Orders

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Row a n s
Defining
M n-t r Orders
Younocan use a row order with row expand row sets or content sets to control how expanded
detail rows are displayed in your report.
You can do the following:
• Display account descriptions in addition to or instead of segment values.
• Sort detail rows by amounts displayed in a column.
• Sort detail rows by account segment values or segment value descriptions.
• Rearrange the sequence of your account segments to fit specific reporting needs.
• Suppress descriptions for particular account segments.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Ranking Methods
s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Methods
a n s
Ranking
M n-t r
no General Ledger offers several ways to order and display expanded detail rows. Select a
Oracle
ranking method and to display segment values, segment value descriptions, or both.
Alternatives include the following:
• Order by ranking, display description: For example, department number.
• Order by ranking, display both: For example, the name of the department.
• Order by description, display description: For example, department description.
• Order by description, display value
• Order by value, display description
• Order by value, display value
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Order by Ranking - Display Description

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Order by Description - Display Description

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Order by Value - Display Value

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Order by Value - Display Description

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a laby Value
a n s
Order
M n-t r - Display Description
noexample, the columns are order by the segment value unless a user was familiar with the
In this
segment value, the report would appear to be in no particular order.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Reviewing Your Row Order Detail Listing Report

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Copying Reports and Components

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Reports
a n s
Copying
M n-t r and Components
nocan copy existing row sets, column sets, content sets, row orders, display sets, reports, and
You
report sets to create new report objects.
After you copy a report object, you can modify the new object instead of recreating a new
object from scratch.
Caution: Modifying a report object will affect all reports that use the report object. To avoid
affecting all reports that use a report object you want to modify, use AutoCopy to create a copy
of the report object, then apply the desired modifications to the copy of the report object.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
FSG Report Prerequisites

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la raPrerequisites
FSG Report
M n-t
o control the print orientation of reports that are less than or equal to 80 characters wide,
•nTo
set the user profile option FSG:Allow Portrait Print Style.
• To limit what financial information can be printed by specific users on their FSG reports,
define security rules and enable them for use with FSG.
• To run reports through standard request submission, your System Administrator must
assign Program - Run Financial Statement Generator to the report security group for your
responsibility.
Note: We recommend that you run the General Ledger Optimizer program before you run your
monthly reports. This will help your financial reporting processes run faster. Program
Optimizer is run from the standard report submission window.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Enabling FSG Security

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la FSGa n s
Enabling
M n-t r Security
nohave General Ledger Super User or System Administrator responsibility, you can define
If you
security rules to control what financial information specific users can print when they run FSG
reports. For example, you can prevent Company 01 users from printing reports for Company
02 and vice versa.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Run FSG Reports from Standard Request Submission

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Reports
a n s
Run FSG
M n-t r from Standard Request Submission
nocan request reports from the Run Financial Reports window or through standard request
You
submission (Submit Requests window). The advantage of requesting reports through standard
request submission is that you can schedule the reports to run automatically. You can also
combine FSG reports with standard reports, listings, and programs. The disadvantage is that
you cannot run report sets through standard request submission.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Downloading Financial Reports

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
la raFinancial
Downloading
M n-t Reports
noyou define the report, or when you run the report, choose Spreadsheet as the output
When
option. FSG produces the report in a tab-delimited format, which facilitates formatting when
you load the report information into a spreadsheet.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Running Financial Report Sets

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Different Output Options for FSG Using XML Publisher

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Output
a n s
Different
M n-t r Options for FSG Using XML Publisher
o
Thenflexibility of XML Publisher is a result of the separation of the presentation of the report
from its data structure. The collection of the data is still handled by the E-Business Suite, but
now you can design and control how the report outputs will be presented in separate template
files. At runtime, XML Publisher merges your designed template files with the report data to
create a variety of outputs to meet a variety of business needs, including:
•Customer-ready PDF documents, such as financial statements, marketing materials, contracts,
invoices, and purchase orders utilizing colors, images, font styles, headers and footers, and
many other formatting and design options.
•HTML output for optimum online viewing.
•Excel output to create a spreadsheet of your report data.
•"Filled-out" third-party provided PDF documents. You can download a PDF document, such
as a government form, to use as a template for your report. At runtime, the data and template
produce a "filled-out" form.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
FSG Tips and Techniques

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la and a n s
FSG Tips
M n-t r Techniques
Ton o
maximize your reporting flexibility and keep report maintenance to a minimum:
• Draft your reports on paper first
• Define a logical chart of accounts and make use of Parent accounts
• Define generic row sets and use existing column sets
• Use the Expand and Both options
• Select the rounding option for your calculations
• Change the order of detail rows
• Use content sets and display sets for your report
• Use AutoCopy
• Transfer report objects from one database to another
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Setting FSG Options for General Ledger

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a n s
laFSGraOptions
Setting
M n-t for General Ledger
noAccounting Flexfield:
FSG:
• Select the General Ledger application reporting flexfield. The default value for this profile
option is account. You cannot view this profile option at the user level. Your System
Administrator must set this profile option at the site or application level.
FSG: Allow Portrait Print Style:
• Control the print orientation of your Financial Statement Generator reports that are less
than or equal to 80 characters wide. You can print these reports in either portrait style (80
character wide) or landscape style (132 character wide).
FSG: Enable Search Optimization:
• Enhance the performance of reports that contain account assignments with a large number
of parent segment values and child segment value ranges. When you set this profile option
to Yes, the FSG performance enhancement is applied.
FSG: Enforce Segment Value Security:
• Control whether your defined security rules will apply to reports produced using FSG.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
FSG: Expand Parent Value:

• Control whether the rollup group or the summary flag associated with flexfield
assignments determine the expansion of parent values when requesting summary balances.
FSG: Message Detail:
• Specify the error message catalogue and level of detail in your error message log file when
you request your Financial Statement Generator reports.

FSG: String Comparison Mode:
• Do not change this profile option unless instructed to do so by Oracle World Wide
Support. This profile option affects the character language for text-based character sets.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Working with the Attribute Set Window

s a
)h ฺ a
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la witha n s
Working
M n-t r the Attribute Set Window
o Attribute Set window to define attribute sets for RXi reports. The attribute set that you
Usenthe
associate with an RXi report determines the layout and data content of the report.
Each RXi report already has one default attribute set associated with it. If you have the proper
security access, you can use this attribute set to print a report. You cannot modify the default
attribute set. However, you can copy the default attribute set and then apply new layout
definitions to the copied attribute set. You can define as many attribute sets as you want for a
report.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Modifying Attribute Sets

s a
)h ฺa
m
co uide
o ฺ
y aho ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a a n s
la Attribute
Modifying
M n-t r Sets
o Attribute Set window to change a new attribute set that you have just copied or to
Usenthe
modify an existing attribute set that you previously defined.
Displayed Columns
• In the Displayed Columns tab, the Available list box displays all columns that are
available for this report but not currently included in the report output. The Displayed list
box displays the report columns that are included in the report output.
• Use the Default Format tab to define how date and time values should be displayed in the
report.
Column Details
• Use the Column Details window to define formatting attributes for individual columns in a
report. All changes are optional and depend on your reporting needs.
• The Level field displays the grouping level for each column.
• The Column Name field displays the interface table column name for each column.
• In the Attribute Name field, you can enter a new report heading for the column.
• In the Length field, you can change the display length in characters of a column.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
• In the Ordering field, select one of these values for each column:
- Ascending: To sort column values in ascending order
- Descending: To sort column values in descending order
- None: To print without ordering column values
Page Formatting
• In the Report Title Field, enter the title you want to appear on the report.
• In the Group Display Type field, select Group Left if you want to place breaking columns
to the left of non-breaking columns, or select Group Above to place breaking columns
above non-breaking columns.
• In the Page Width and Page Height fields, enter the number of characters to designate the
page width and page height of the reports.
• In the Print Report Headings section, enter the headings that you want to print in the report
heading.
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Defining Summary Details

s a
h
) ฺ a
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la Summary
a n s
Defining
M n-t r Details
no column is a column whose values are either summed or counted. You can
A summary
designate what is summed and counted, and you can rename the default summary prompts.
The Summary Details window displays the report summary levels and the column grouping
levels for the column that you select in the Column Details window.
The report summary levels are:
• Page Total Sum: The sum or count of records on the current page printed at the bottom of
the page.
• Running Page Total: The sum or count of records up to and including the current page
printed at the bottom of the page.
• Previous Page Total Sum: The sum or count of records up to but not including the current
page printed at the top of the page.
• Report Total Sum: The sum or count of records in the entire report. The grouping levels
displayed in the Summary Details window are all grouping levels up to, but not including,
the grouping level for the selected column.
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Summary
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

EMAK
Summary (continued)
s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

s a
h
) ฺa
o m
o o ฺc uide
y ah ent G
0 0 0@ Stud
e s 2 this
g e rg use
l a k_ e to
( m a ns
c e
r g es le li
k Ge ferab
a la rans
M n-t
no
Financial Reporting

D70379GC10 sg1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D70379GC10 sg1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited. Copyright© 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates.

Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved.

without the express authorization of Oracle.

Restricted Rights Notice

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

Chapter 3 - Chapter 03 - Ledger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Oracle General Ledger Process

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Oracle General Ledger Overview

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

General Ledger Overview

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Functions and Features

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

General Ledger Accounting Cycle

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Critical Implementation Issues

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Oracle General Ledger Integrates with …

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

• Oracle Lease Management sends accounting distributions related to leases, such as

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Oracle General Ledger Integrates with …

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Also Integrates with …

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

applications to give you real-time information all in one place.

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Integrating with Subledgers

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Importing to General Ledger from Non-Oracle Applications

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Overview of Accounting Setup Manager

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Foreign Currency Concepts

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Multiple Currency Support

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger Process

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.